Yamaha RX-V2500 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V2500

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WD64260

RX-V2500

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

OWNER'S MANUAL

MODE D'EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

RX-V2500

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cable

from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit

in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from

the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

General model.............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the

plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and

an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even

if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the

standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

Note

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured

markings identifying the terminals in your plug,

proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected

to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or

coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured

BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is

marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

English

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Remote control........................................................... 6

Using the remote control ........................................... 8

Front panel display .................................................... 9

Rear panel ................................................................ 11

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12

Speaker placement ................................................... 12

Speaker connections ................................................ 13

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17

Before connecting components................................ 17

Connecting video components................................. 18

Connecting audio components................................. 21

Connecting the antennas.......................................... 23

Connecting the power cable..................................... 24

Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25

Turning on the power............................................... 25

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26

Introduction.............................................................. 26

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26

Starting the setup ..................................................... 27

Confirming the results ............................................. 29

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32

Basic operations....................................................... 32

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 33

Additional operations............................................... 34

Selecting input modes.............................................. 39

TUNING ................................................................ 40

Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 40

Presetting stations .................................................... 41

Selecting preset stations........................................... 43

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43

Receiving RDS stations ........................................... 44

Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 44

PTY SEEK function ................................................ 45

EON function........................................................... 46

RECORDING ....................................................... 47

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................48

For movie/video sources.......................................... 48

For music sources .................................................... 51

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................52

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 52

SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................53

Changing parameter settings ................................... 55

Input Select .............................................................. 56

Manual setup: Sound ............................................... 58

Manual setup: Basic................................................. 61

Manual setup: Option .............................................. 65

System Memory....................................................... 67

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................69

Control area ............................................................. 69

Setting remote control codes ................................... 70

Programming codes from other remote controls

(Learn) ................................................................. 72

Changing source names in the display window....... 74

Using the Macro feature .......................................... 75

Clearing function sets .............................................. 77

Clearing individual functions .................................. 78

Controlling each component.................................... 80

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND

AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY).....................81

Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 81

Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 82

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................84

Advanced setup menu.............................................. 84

Front panel display system options menu................ 85

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......89

What is a sound field? ............................................. 89

Changing parameter settings ................................... 89

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................90

TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................95

GLOSSARY.........................................................100

Audio formats ........................................................ 100

Sound field programs............................................. 101

Audio information ................................................. 102

Video signal information ....................................... 103

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER

INFORMATION .............................................104

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................105

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front: 130 W + 130 W

Center: 130 W

Surround: 130 W + 130 W

Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W

Sound field features

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆ THX Select

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,

DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

◆ RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Other features

◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer for automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to

optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video

system

◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi

channel input

◆ Short message function

◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and

PCM sources

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔

S-video → component video) capability for monitor

out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening mode

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and

learning/macro capability

◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models

only)

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd.

Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and

Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

FEATURES

GETTING STARTED

English

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)

according to the polarity markings on the

inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the

operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator

does not flash, or its light or display window become dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

EXIT

TOP

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Remote control Batteries (4)

(AAA, LR03)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphone

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

Speaker terminal wrench

Power cable

Indoor FM antenna

(U.K., Europe and

Australia models)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Korea, Asia and General

models)

Installing batteries in the remote

controls

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the remote control code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you

turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 6

to 7 second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.

In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2 INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

3 PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when

turned on (see page 37).

4 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting preset station numbers and tuning.

6 FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO”

indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off).

9 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

0 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

A SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT MODE

INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

FM/AM

EDIT

SILENT CINEMA

S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

MEMORY

PHONES

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PRESET/

TUNING

PRESET

/TUNING

TUNING

MODE

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT

EFFECT

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

PURE DIRECT

STANDBY

/ON

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR2

YPAO

1 24 0

ABC EF

DHI LKJ

3 9

PQRO

EON PTY SEEK

MODE START

RDS MODE

/FREQ

M N

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

6785

(U.K. and Europe models only)

(U.S.A. model)

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

B MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

C INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39).

D REC OUT/ZONE 2

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video

recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source

you are listening to or watching in the main room. When

set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is

directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the

source you record are always identical

REC OUT (other models)

Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video

recorder independent of the source you are listening to or

watching. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position,

the input source is directed to all outputs.

E OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied

microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see

page 26).

F A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).

G PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is

displayed next to the band indication in the front panel

display.

Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not

displayed.

H PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the front left and right channels.

I VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from an external source such

as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these

jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

J ZONE ON/OFF (MAIN)

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

Turns the main unit on or to the standby mode (see

page 83).

K ZONE ON/OFF (ZONE 2)

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

Turns Zone 2 on or to the standby mode (see page 83).

L TONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right

and center channels (see page 34).

M PROGRAM

Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble

balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).

N STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

■ U.K. and Europe models only

O RDS MODE/FREQ

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station

to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY

mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS

data service) and/or the frequency display mode (see

page 44).

P EON

Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,

INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see

page 46).

Q PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode

(see page 45).

R PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode (see page 45).

■ Opening and closing the front panel

door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 69.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 Transmission indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

4 Display window

Shows the name of the selected source component that

you can control.

5 PRESET +/–

Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner

mode.

6 LIGHT button

Press to light up remote control buttons and display

window.

7 A/B/C/D/E

Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode.

8 TOP

Selects the graphical user interface (GUI) mode for your

video monitor.

9 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER

Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI

menu items.

0 RETURN

Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel

display menu mode.

A Sound field program/Numeric buttons

Use to select sound field programs or input numbers.

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when

this unit is in tuner mode.

B MEMORY 1/2

Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO settings

or additional preset stations (see page 68).

C MACRO ON/OFF

Turns the macro function on and off.

D MACRO

Use to program a series of operations for control by a

single button (see page 75).

E STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

F SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

G INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39).

H SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

Remote control

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT

EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

I MULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder (etc.).

J SELECT k / n

Selects another component that you can control

independently of the input component selected with the

input selector buttons.

K VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

L AMP/SOURCE/TV

Selects the component you want to control with the

remote control.

AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit.

SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component

selected with an input selector button.

TV: Set to this position to operate the television.

To set the remote control codes for components, see

page 70.

M MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

N PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37).

O EXIT

Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode.

P NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 37).

Q DISPLAY

Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode.

R STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

S EXTD. SUR

Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of

multi-channel software.

T SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

U RE-NAME

Used to change the input source name in the display

window (see page 74).

V CLEAR

Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn,

macro and rename features, or setting remote control

codes (see page 77).

W LEARN

Used to set up the remote control code or program

functions from other remote controls (see page 72).

■ U.K. and Europe models only

X RDS tuning buttons

(Available when this unit is in tuner mode)

FREQ/RDS

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station

to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT

mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data

services) and/or the frequency display (see page 44).

EON

Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,

INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see

page 46).

PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode

(see page 45).

PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode (see page 45).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity such as near a bath

– high temperature such as near a heater or stove

– extremely low temperature

– dusty places

Using the remote control

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT MODE

INPUT

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT

EFFECT

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

PURE DIRECT

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

FM/AM

EDIT

PHONES

S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

MEMORY

SILENT CINEMA

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PRESET/

TUNING

PRESET

/TUNING

TUNING

MODE

OPTIMIZER

MIC

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR

/VCR2

30 30

YPAO

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

1 Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

2 Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

3 NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

4 Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

5 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

6 YPAO indicator

Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the

auto setup speaker settings are used without any

modifications.

7 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

8 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

9 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

0 THX indicator

Lights up when a THX program is selected.

A PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

B SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

C VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 38).

D Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

E SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected, or when bi-wiring.

F SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 34).

G Multi-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

H HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program.

I MEMORY indicator

Blinks to show a station can be stored.

J TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

K MUTE indicator

Blinks while the MUTE function is on.

Front panel display

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

NIGHT

VIRTUAL

ZONE2

ZONE3

ZONE4

SLEEP

YPAO

HiFi DSP

STEREO

TUNED

EON

AUTO

MEMORY

MUTE

VOLUME

DIGITAL

MATRIX

DISCRETE

PCM

THX

SILENT

CINEMA

A B

LFE

96/24

LL C R

SL SB SR

PL x

PS PTY RT CT

PTY

HOLD

AFGHK

135678

DIJ

NO0

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and

Australia models only)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround/surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

L 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

M LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.

N Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of current digital input

signal.

O Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back

speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 26) or

Speaker Level setting (page 64).

P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on.

Q RDS indicators

(U.K. and Europe models only)

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up.

EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON

data service is being received.

PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the

PTY SEEK mode.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

See page 21 for details.

2 Antenna terminals

See page 23 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 18 and 20 for connection information.

4 Audio component jacks

See page 21 for connection information.

5 Speaker terminal wrench hook

Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use.

6 RS-232C terminal

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.

Consult you dealer for details.

7 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

See page 81 for details.

8 CONTROL OUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

These are control expansion terminals for commercial use.

9 AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see

page 24).

0 AC INLET

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see

page 24).

A DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details.

B ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

See page 81 for details.

C MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 19 for connection information.

D PRE OUT jacks

See page 22 for connection information.

E Speaker terminals

See page 13 for connection information.

F PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

PRESENCE speaker terminals

(other models)

See page 13 for connection information.

Rear panel

GND

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK SINGLE

MONITOR

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

VIDEO

OUT

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

ZONE 2

CENTERSUB WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUTOUTPUT

AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

SURROUND

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

DVD

COAXIAL

–

––

–

RS-232C

DVR/

VCR 2

CONTROL OUT

REMOTE

IN IN OUT

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

DTVDTV

CBL/

SAT

+12V 15mA MAX.

PRESENCE/ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT (6 ch)/ SB (8 ch)

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

FRONT

SURROUND

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

1234678 9

FEDCB

(U.S.A. model)

SPEAKER SETUP

For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below.

The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended

by the ITU-R (see page 102). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA

DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX.

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m

(1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly

inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in

the Sound menu (see page 60).

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

More than 30 cm (12 in)

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

Note

English

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

■ Di-pole speaker layout

Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used

for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please

place the surround and surround back speakers according

to the speaker layout below.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set

this unit’s speaker impedance setting to

6 ohms before using (see page 25). If you will

use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial

setting for speaker impedance.

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this

unit is disconnected from the power source.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do

not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speaker still creates interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3 Loosen the knob.

The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for

loosening or tightening knobs.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

SBR

SBL

30˚ 30˚

: Di-pole speaker

: Direction of di-pole speaker

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8 in)

SPEAKER SETUP

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or

PRESENCE speaker terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

■ Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and

PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one

banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not

attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe

and Asia models)

English

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK SINGLE

–

––

–

PRESENCE/ZONE 2

FRONT

SURROUND

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

231

7 8 65 109

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back speakers

LeftRight

LeftRight LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

Speaker layout

(U.S.A. model)

LeftRight

Presence speakers

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set

to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 60).

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only

operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

Subwoofer with

built-in amplifier

SPEAKER SETUP

■ FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of

the FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems

simultaneously.

Bi-wired connection

The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to

one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for

each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the

tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press

SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so

that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display.

■ CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

■ SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

■ SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

■ SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you

only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the

left (L) terminals.

■ PRESENCE terminals

Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only)

You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see

page 66).

Note

Bi-wired connection

FRONT

–

This unit

Note

CONNECTIONS

English

PREPARATION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■ Cable indications

■ Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this

unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs

to the left jacks.

■ Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit

are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO

jacks. When “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 65),

signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output

through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can

also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

VIDEO jack

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jack

For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO

jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit

Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On”

(see page 65)

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for DVD playback

Connecting video components

DVD

MONITOR

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

DVD player

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

Optical out Video out

Audio out

Video in

Coaxial out

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-

amplifier.

If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign:

Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.

Notes

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIOAUDIO

DVD

DTV

CBL

/SAT

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

LRLR

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

CENTER

SUB WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Multi-format player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Front out

Surround out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for other video components

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a

game console or camcorder, to this unit.

AUDIOVIDEO

CBL/

SAT

OUT

VCR 1

DIGITAL INPUT

CBL/SAT

COAXIAL

DVR/

VCR 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

DTVDTV

CBL/

SAT

LR LR

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

(U.S.A. model)

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

Video out

Video in

Audio in

Coaxial out

S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

S-video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connections for audio components

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

Connecting audio components

DIGITAL INPUT

GND

AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

LRLRLR LR

LRLR

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(U.S.A. model)

CD recorder

Turntable

Optical out

Coaxial out

Audio in Audio out

Optical in

Audio inAudio out

Audio out

GND

Audio out

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER

PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.

• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set

to “Zone B” (see page 66), signals will only be output from the

FRONT PRE OUT jacks.

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.

5 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the

corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround

back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals

output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

may not correspond to the correct speakers.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer.

• Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 61).

Notes

FRONT

SURROUND

SUB WOOFER

SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

PRE OUT

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

1 Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

2 Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

3 Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

4 Insert the cable

wire into the slot,

and clamp it with

pliers.

5 Snap the cover into place.

Connecting the antennas

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

DTVDTV

CBL/

SAT

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna

GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

Notes

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Unit:

mm (in)

Lead wire

Clamp

Insert the wire

into the slot

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other

connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an

AC wall outlet.

Do not use other AC power cables. Use the one provided.

Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard or

electrical shock.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model............................................................... None

Other models......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets

will supply power to any connected component whenever

this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W

Other models ........................................................... 100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

General model....... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

Asia model........................... AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz

■ Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power cable

AC OUTLETS

(U.S.A. model)

SELE

CTO

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model)

CAUTION

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.

1 On the front panel, while holding down

STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.

“SP IMP.–8ΩMIN” appears on the front panel

display.

2 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the

impedance of your speakers.

You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms.

3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.

This unit will be set to the standby mode.

Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced

menu (see page 84).

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to

6 ohms before turning on the power.

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote controls) to turn on the power of this

unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control)

to enter the standby mode.

Speaker impedance setting

Note

CAUTION

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STANDBY

/ON

SP IMP.-8 MIN

Turning on the power

Note

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

AMP

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO SETUP

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the auto setup procedure.

• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,

follow the troubleshooting on page 30.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

Wiring

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker.

Distance

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the timing of each channel.

Size

Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the

appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.

Equalizing

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric

equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and

create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly

important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers

for some channels or have a room with unique sonic

characteristics.

YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three

parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the

seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly

precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.

Level

Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each

speaker.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to

disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

Notes

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALL R

OPTIMIZER

MIC

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

(U.S.A. model)

Optimizer microphone position

English

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too

much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.

2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

TOP on the remote control.

The top display appears.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup,

then press h.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu,

then press h.

5 Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring,

Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then

press h.

6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select:

Check To automatically check and adjust the selected

item.

Skip To skip the selected item and perform no

adjustments.

When using THX speakers, select Skip for Size and make

sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set

(page 61) and that “80Hz (THX)” is selected in Bass Cross

Over (page 63).

Starting the setup

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

Subwoofer

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

TOP

TITLE

Sound

Option

Basic

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

System Memory

Input Select

Stereo/Surround

AMP

SOURCE

ENTER

Information

Setup Type

Start

Setup Menu

Auto Setup

System Memory

Audio Info.

Manual Setup

Input Select

Setup Menu

Setup Type

Start

Wiring

Distance

Size

Information

Skip

Check

Wiring

Distance

Size

Skip

Check

Size

Equalizing

Level

Distance

Wiring

Skip

Check

Distance

Size

Equalizing

Wiring

Skip

Check: Natural

Check: Flat

Check: Front

Equalizing

Level

Size

Distance

Skip

Check

Level

Equalizing

Size

AUTO SETUP

For Equalizing, press k / n to select:

Skip To skip the selected item and perform no

adjustments.

Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all

speakers with higher frequencies being less

emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”

setting sounds a little harsh.

Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all

speakers. Recommended if all of your

speakers are of similar quality.

Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each

speaker in accordance with the sound of

your front speakers. Recommended if your

front speakers are of much higher quality

than your other speakers.

7 Once you have selected the desired setting,

press l to move back to Setup Menu.

8 Press n to select Setup Type, then select:

Auto To automatically perform the entire

auto setup procedure.

Step To pause for confirmation between

each check in the auto setup procedure.

9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER.

Loud test tones are output from each speaker and

“Measuring” appears during the auto setup

procedure.

• To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor

buttons (

k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode,

press k to retry the procedure,

l to cancel auto setup.

• If an error message appears during testing, refer to

“Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on

page 30, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto

setup procedure.

Setup Menu

Setup Type

Start

Wiring

Distance

Size

Information

Setup Type

Start

Auto

Step

Setup Menu

Information

Press ENTERStart

Setup Type

Setup Menu

English

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

You can confirm the results of each analysis.

If you set Setup Type to Auto.

The results are displayed after all items have been

analysed.

• Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.

• Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.

• Press h and select Detail to view information about

measurement results and warning messages. For more

details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for

the auto setup procedure” on page 30.

• Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup

procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on

the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.

To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

If you set Setup Type to Step.

The results are displayed individually after each analysis.

•Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next

menu item.

•Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.

•Press h and select Detail to view information about

measurement results and warning messages. For more

details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for

the auto setup procedure” on page 30.

•Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup

procedure.

After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement

Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item

are displayed.

•Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.

•Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.

•Press h and select Detail to view information about

measurement results and warning messages. For more

details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for

the auto setup procedure” on page 30.

•Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup

procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on

the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.

To cancel the settings and exit, select No.

If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system

parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to

the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup

menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu,

press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust,

then press ENTER.

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate

your system.

• In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer

than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your

subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external

amplifier.

• In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the

same band to provide finer adjustments.

Confirming the results

Measurement Over

Successfully

Start

Setup Type

Setup Menu

Retry

Setup

Exit Detail

Notes

Equalizing

Size

Distance

Level

Result

Retry

Exit Detail

AUTO SETUP

■ Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure

Before auto setup

During auto setup

Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.

Error message Cause Remedy

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.

No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. • Select at least one setup menu item.

Memory Guard! This setting is protected. • Remove the protection setting for auto setup (see

page 67).

Error message Cause Remedy

E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

• Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B.

• Check the front L/R speaker connections.

E02:No Surr. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.

E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.

E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is

detected.

• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup in a quiet environment.

• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air

conditioners, or move them away from this unit.

E06:Check Surr. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

• Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround

back speaker(s).

E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the auto setup procedure.

• Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test

tones.

• Check the microphone setting.

• Check the speaker connections and placement.

E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled

because a setting that affects auto setup was

changed during the procedure.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again.

E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. • Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure

again.

English

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

After auto setup

The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We

recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may

appear depending on the speakers even when

they are connected correctly.

• Check the speaker connections.

W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.

W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the

speakers is excessive. (No level correction is

made.)

• Readjust the speaker installation.

• Check the speaker connections.

• Use speakers of similar quality.

• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.

W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the

measurement results of wiring (only occurs

when the wiring measurement procedure is

skipped).

• Check the speaker connections.

PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (set AMP/SOURCE/TV to

AMP then press SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

When bi-wiring, select both A and B.

4 Select the input source.

Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons

on the remote control) to select the input you desire.

The current input source name and input mode appear

in the front panel display and video monitor for a few

seconds.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

1 4

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

PURE DIRECT

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

EXIT

TOP

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MACROONOFF

EXIT

TOP

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel

Remote control

AMP

SOURCE

SPEAKERS

+10

ENT.

SPEAKERS

Front panel Remote control

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

DVD AUTO

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VOLUME

LL R

Selected input source

Input mode

VOLUME

VOL

–

Remote control

Front panel

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

7 Select a sound field program if desired.

Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field

program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field

program. See page 48 for details about sound field

programs.

When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following

display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal

level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX

recommendation).

■ Front panel operation

Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Note

PROGRAM

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Remote control

Front panel

DialNorm;;+4dB

Selecting sound field programs

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT M MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

PROGRAM

(U.S.A. model)

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

LL R

Hall in Munich

Program name

PROGRAM

PLAYBACK

■ Remote control operation

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of

the sound field program buttons repeatedly to

select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,

and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

■ To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass/treble

balance for the front left/right and

center channels.

Press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly on the front panel to

select TREBLE or BASS.

Select TREBLE, then rotate

PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the high-

frequency response.

Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the low-frequency response.

To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly to select BYPASS.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the

surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and

center speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or

PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

• If headphones are connected to this unit, the TONE CONTROL

setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones (see

page 59).

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator flashes on the

front panel display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator

disappears from the display.

You can adjust the muting level (see page 60).

■ To listen with headphones

(“SILENT CINEMA”)

“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT

CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When

activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI

CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

•

“SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a

2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.

Notes

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

EXIT

TOP

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Sound field

program buttons

AMP/SOURCE/TV

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

LL R

Hall in Munich

AMP

SOURCE

Program name

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Additional operations

Notes

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MUTE

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”

appears in the front panel display and video monitor.

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display

and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector

buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH

INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software in

6.1/7.1 channel surround

If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use

this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-

channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby

Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD.

SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1

and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.

To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly

when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed.

Auto (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/

7.1 channels.

Decoders (select with l / h)

You can select from the following modes depending on the

format of the software you are playing.

PLIIxMovie

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.

PLIIxMusic

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.

EX/ES

For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the

DTS-ES decoder.

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

Off (OFF)

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1

channels.

When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see

page 62), the surround back channel will output from the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie,

PLIIxMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is

pressed in the following cases:

– When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None” (see

page 62).

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R

channel signals.

– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back

is set to “None” (see page 62).

• “PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to

“Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 62).

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

EXTD. SUR

Notes

PLAYBACK

■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

STANDARD on the remote control to switch

between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR.

ENHANCED programs.

Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to

select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs.

Press SELECT on the remote control to select

the decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on the

type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

When you select the SUR. STANDARD program

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE

THEATER or THX program

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

• You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter

in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 89).

• You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote

control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message

display.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is

set to “None” (see page 62).

STANDARD

MOVIE

THX

SELECT

Note

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

(PURE DIRECT)

PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP

processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry,

allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity

from analog and PCM sources.

Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.

The button lights up and the front panel display

automatically goes out

The front panel display switches on momentarily when an

operation is performed.

To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.

The indicator around the front panel button goes out and

the previous settings are restored.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will

be heard.)

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL (page 34) and GUI menu (page 53) settings

are not effective.

• The following operations are not possible during PURE

DIRECT operation:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the short message

– adjusting GUI menu parameters

– all video functions (video conversion etc.)

• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is

set to the standby mode.

■ Night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the

type of material you are playing.

Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to

select cinema or music.

When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in

the front panel display lights up.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources

to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.

Press l / h to adjust the effect level while

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

This adjusts the level of compression.

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored

independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT,

MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even

though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is

selected).

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

Notes

Remote control

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

PLAYBACK

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the

remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or Both

is selected in Bass Out.

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals

In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are

output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.

If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP

activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA

DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is

set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases:

– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine images from a video source with sound

from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery

from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons to select a video

source, then select an audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.

Note

2ch Stereo

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

Front panel Remote control

Note

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signal you want to

use.

1 Select the input source.

2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) Digital signals

2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound

field program.

• You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 67).

• DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD

encoded in DTS.

If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

■ Displaying information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1 Press TOP on the remote control.

2 Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info.

The following information appears in the

display.

Format Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “?” appears.

Channel Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2

surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

Dialogue Dialogue normalization information

for Dolby Digital signals.

Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “– – –” appears.

Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

Selecting input modes

Note

INPUT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

INPUT MODE

DVD AUTO

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VOLUME

LL R

TRANSMIT

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

Front panel Remote control

Input mode

Sampling

Bitrate

Channel

Format

Flag1

Flag2

Dialogue

---

2/0/---

Analog

---

Auto Setup

Audio Info

System Memory

TUNING

There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l

to tune into a lower frequency.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown on the front panel display.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an

FM station will automatically change the reception mode

to monaural to increase the signal quality.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

PURE DIRECT

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

A~~AM~1440 kHz

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD T

AUTO

PRESET/

TUNING

A~~AM~1530 kHz

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD T

TUNE

AUTO

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Disappears

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

A~~AM~1440 kHz

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD T

PRESET/

TUNING

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through

E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting

stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Presetting stations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

321

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

A1:FM 87.5 MHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

AUTO

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations

in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 40 for tuning instructions.

When tuned into a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears on the front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

3 2,5

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

(U.S.A. model)

A :AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

VOLUME

LL R

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

A/B/C/D/E

C :AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

Notes

PRESET/

TUNING

C3:AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

C3:AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

VOLUME

LL R

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

When performing this operation with the remote

control, first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE,

then press TUNER to set the remote to tuner

mode.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/–

on the remote control) to select a preset

station number (1 through 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Selecting preset stations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

(U.S.A. model)

A/B/C/D/E

TV INPUT

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/

TUNING

–

PRESET

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNE

TUNED

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

Front panel

Remote control

Exchanging preset stations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

1,3

2,4

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

(U.S.A. model)

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

TUNED

MEMORY

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R

EDIT E1-A5

TUNING

RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system

used by FM stations in many countries. The RDS function

is carried out among the network stations.

This unit can receive various RDS data such as PS

(Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio

Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other

Networks) when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.

■ PS (Program Service name) mode:

The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.

■ PTY (Program Type) mode:

There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.

■ RT (Radio Text) mode:

Information about the program (such as the title of the

song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being

received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric

characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other

characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with

under-bars.

■ CT (Clock Time) mode:

The current time is displayed and updated every minute.

If the data flow is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may

appear.

■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks):

See “EON function” on page 46.

Four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS

data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that

correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station

light up in the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/

FREQ (or FREQ/RDS on the remote control) repeatedly

to display the various RDS data offered by the

transmitting station as shown below.

When performing this operation with the remote control, first

press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.

• Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until an RDS indicator lights

up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if

you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has

not finished receiving all of the RDS data from the station.

• RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.

• This unit cannot utilize the RDS data source if the signal

received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode

requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT

mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY,

etc.) are displayed.

• RDS data may not be received under poor reception conditions.

In such cases, press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO

indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this

will change the reception mode to manual, RDS data may be

displayed when you change the display to RDS mode.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference

during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service

may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front

panel display.

Receiving RDS stations

NEWS News

AFFAIRS Current affairs

INFO General information

SPORT Sports

EDUCATE Education

DRAMA Drama

CULTURE Culture

SCIENCE Science

VARIED Light entertainment

POP M Pop

ROCK M Rock

M.O.R. M

Middle-of-the-road music

(easy-listening)

LIGHT M Light classics

CLASSICS Serious classics

OTHER M Other music

Changing the RDS mode

Notes

RDS MODE

/FREQ

FREQ/RDS

PTY

Frequency

display mode

Front panel

Remote control

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

If you select the desired program type, this unit

automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are

broadcasting a program of the required type.

When performing this operation with the remote control, first

press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.

1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the

PTY SEEK mode.

The program type of the station being received or

“NEWS” blinks in the front panel display.

To exit from the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK

MODE again.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/–

on the remote control) to select the desired

program type.

The selected program type appears on the front panel

display.

3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching

all preset RDS stations.

The selected program type flashes and the PTY

HOLD indicator lights up on the front panel display

while searching for stations.

To cancel searching, press PTY SEEK START again.

• The unit stops searching when it finds a station

broadcasting the selected type of program.

• If the found station is not the one you desire one,

press PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes

searching for another station broadcasting the same

type of program.

PTY SEEK function

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PURE DIRECT

EON PTY SEEK

MODE START

RDS MODE

/FREQ

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

1 3

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

EXIT

TOP

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

1, 3

(Europe model)

PTY SEEK

MODE

START

Blinks

MODE PTY SEEK START

Front panel

Remote control

PRESET/

TUNING

–

PRESET

Front panel

Remote control

PTY HOLD

PTY SEEK

MODE

START

Lights up

MODE PTY SEEK START

Remote control

Front panel

TUNING

This function uses the EON data service on the RDS

station network. If you select the desired program type

(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit

automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are

scheduled to broadcast the selected type of program and

switches from the station currently being received to the

new station when the broadcast starts.

This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers

the EON data service is being received. When such a station is

being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

1 Check that the EON indicator is lit on the

front panel display.

If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another

RDS station so that the EON indicator lights up.

2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired

program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or

SPORT).

The selected program type name appears on the front

panel display.

• If a preset RDS station type starts broadcasting the

selected type of program, the unit automatically

switches from the program being received to that

program. (EON indicator flashes.)

• When broadcasting of the selected program ends,

the unit returns to the previous station (or another

program on the same station).

■ To cancel this function

Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is

shown on the front panel display.

EON function

Note

RDS MODE

/FREQ

EON

Front panel

Remote control

RECORDING

English

BASIC

OPERATION

You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT control

to record one source while watching and/or listening to

another source.

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for those components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2 or

REC OUT.

• To record the current input source that you are

watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or

REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE.

• To record a source other than the one that you are

watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or

REC OUT to the source you want to record.

After this setting, you can change the source you

are listening to and/or watching without effecting

the recording by rotating INPUT (or pressing one

of the input selector buttons on the remote control).

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

• To record audio and video from different sources, set REC

OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a

video source first then select an audio source (see page 38).

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 (U.S.A.,

Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) are always

the same.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, Speaker Level

(page 64) and programs does not affect recorded material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal to your VCR.

• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not

output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.

Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are

not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your

source component is connected to provide only digital (or

analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player

is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation

instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

DVD

D–TV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

/VCR2

DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

EON PTY SEEK

MODE START

RDS MODE

/FREQ

PURE DIRECT

SILENT CINEMA

PHONES

YPAO

ZONE ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE 2

(U.S.A. model)

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR2

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR2

Notes

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 39) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel

sources as is.

MULTI

2-CH

ENTERTAINMENT:

TV Sports

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the

sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching

various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence

sound field.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Game

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

MOVIE THEATER:

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the

sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER:

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the

latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space

amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

MOVIE THEATER:

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of

the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to

that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained

as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER:

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The

presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,

restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

THX:

THX Cinema

THX processing for any multi-channel sources (including DTS-ES).

English

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

THX:

THX Surr. EX

THX processing for any 5.1 channel source.

MULTI

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIxMovie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIxMovie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital

sources.

DTS:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.

DTS:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96 kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS 96/24:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS ES:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

DTS ES:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS 96 kHz/

24-bit DTS sources.

DTS 96/24 ES:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for 96kHz/24-bit

DTS sources.

Program Features Sources

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

2-CH

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources.

PLIIx Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

PLIIx Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for movie software.

PLII Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PLII Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic II) for movie software.

PLIIx Game:

SUR. STANDARD

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.

PLII Game:

SUR. STANDARD

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.

Neo:6 Cinema:

SUR. STANDARD

DTS processing for movie software.

Neo:6 Cinema:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (DTS Neo:6) for movie software.

Program Features Sources

English

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

For music sources

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

2 (left and right) channel playback.

MULTI

2-CH

STEREO:

7ch Stereo

Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

MUSIC:

Hall in Munich

HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500

seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the

walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.

MUSIC:

Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,

rich sound.

MUSIC:

Freiburg

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a

high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early

reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.

MUSIC:

The Bttm Line

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous

New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering

a real and vibrant sound.

MUSIC:

The Roxy Thtr

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this

program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left

of the hall.

MUSIC:

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if

you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

MUSIC:

Classic/Opera

CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by

restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it

reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-

energy, “immediate” sound.

q D+PLIIxMusic:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

MULTI

q D+PLIIxMusic:

SUR. ENHANCED

DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.

2-CH

PLII Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.

Neo:6 Music:

SUR. STANDARD

DTS processing for music software.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S).

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to

set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time for

the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator goes off.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front

panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Using the sleep timer

TRANSMIT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

SLEEP

SLEEP 120 min SLEEP 90 min

SLEEP 60 minSLEEP 30 minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

VOLUME

LL R

Hall in Munich

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

VOLUME

LL R

SLEEP

SYSTEM OPTIONS

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates.

Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround)

Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 89).

■ Input Select (Input select)

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack.

■ Manual Setup (Manual setup)

Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings.

Sound (Sound)

Use to manually adjust the sound parameters.

Basic (Basic)

Use to quickly setup basic system parameters.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Item Features Page

I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

Rename Changes the name of the input.

Multi CH Assign Selects the number of audio channels input through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

Item Features Page

LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.

Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones.

Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.

Item Features Page

Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.

Speaker Set

Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output,

and the cross over frequency.

Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Option (Option)

Use to adjust the optional system settings.

■ Auto Setup (Auto setup)

Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26).

■ System Memory (System memory)

Use to save and recall various settings (see page 67).

■ Audio Info. (Audio signal information)

Use to check audio signal information (see page 39).

Item Features Page

Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.

Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings.

Surr.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs.

Input Mode Selects the initial input mode of the source.

Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings.

English

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then

press h to enter the selected menu.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the

parameter you want to adjust.

5 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n

repeatedly to change the setting of the item

you want to adjust.

6 Press EXIT.

If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press

ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item.

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is

set to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set

Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67).

Changing parameter settings

EXIT

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

3-5

Center

Surround

Front

Speaker Set

Speaker Distance

Speaker Level

Test Tone

None

Large

Small

Surround

Surround Back

Presence

Center

Front

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter values will return to the

factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter

value again.

60Hz

40Hz

90Hz

100Hz

80Hz (THX)

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

Bass Out

Presence

60Hz

40Hz

90Hz

100Hz

80Hz (THX)

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

Bass Out

Presence

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the

input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the

signal input to each jack.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Select Input Select, then press h.

4 Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then

press h to access and adjust.

■ I/O Assignment

(Input / output assignment)

You can assign the digital audio input/output and

component video jacks to other components if this unit’s

initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change

the following parameters to reassign the jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component using INPUT SELECTOR on

the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote

control.

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >

I/O Assignment >

Example 1:

To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input.

1) Select Input Select, then select DVD.

2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select

7 CD.

Example 2:

To clear a jack assignment.

1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD,

etc.).

2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment

(Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or

Component Video).

3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the

assignment.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

■ Volume Trim (Volume trim)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to

each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Volume Trim >

Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

Input Select

AMP

SOURCE

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

CBL/SAT

DVD

Input Select

Manual Setup

Auto Setup

Stereo/Surround

Notes

Optical Input

Coaxial Input

Optical Output

I/O Assignment

Volume Trim

Rename

English

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Rename (Rename)

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the

GUI and front panel display. (DVD is used as the source

component in the following example.)

Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or character you want to edit.

3 Press ENTER to select a character type

(CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK).

4 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and l / h to move to the next one.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press

ENTER to switch between character types:

CAPITAL A to Z, space

SMALL a to z, space

FIGURE 0 to 9, space

MARK !, #, %, &, etc.

• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.

5 Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER

when complete.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

■ Multi CH Assign

(Multi channel assignment)

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a

source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an

external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the

additional front signals.

Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign

Input Channels

This setting is used to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6ch, 8ch

If Zone2 Amplifier (page 66) is set to “Internal”, no sound is

output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”.

In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external

component to 6 channels.

Front Input

If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select

analog jacks to which front signals from an external

decoder will be input.

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,

V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

CAPITAL

OK RESET

DVD

I/O Assignment

Volume Trim

Rename

Note

Input Channels

Front Input

Multi CH Assign

Volume Trim

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Select Manual Setup, then press h.

4 Select Sound, then press h.

5 Select the desired parameters, then press h

to access and adjust.

■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

To access these parameters, select:

Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level >

Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)

Speaker (Speaker)

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone (Headphone)

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be

output from the SUBWOOFER jack.

■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting

is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital

and DTS signals.

To access these parameters, select:

Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range >

Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),

MIN (minimum)

Speaker (Speaker)

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Headphone (Headphone)

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

• Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of

dynamic range.

• Select “STD” for general use.

• Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

Manual setup: Sound

AMP

SOURCE

Dynamic Range

LFE Level

Tone Control

Audio Option

Parametric EQ

Sound

Basic

Option

Speaker

Headphone

0.0dB

Note

Speaker

Headphone

STD

MIN

MAX

English

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the PEQ for any speaker.

1 Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker

you want to adjust.

• Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output

when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker.

• Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left

speaker.

• Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right

speaker.

• Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center

speaker.

• Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround left speaker.

• Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround right speaker.

• Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround back left speaker.

• Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the

surround back right speaker.

• Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the

presence left speaker.

• Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the

presence right speaker.

2 Press h to access the settings window.

3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press

ENTER to select a parameter from Band

(band), Freq (frequency) or Q (Q factor).

4 Press n EDIT and press ENTER to access the

edit window.

The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted.

•Press l / h to adjust the parameter.

•Press k / n to adjust the Gain.

• Press ENTER to exit the edit window.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied

with the results.

If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the

selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER.

6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the

settings window.

• If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a

graphic equalizer.

• For more information on the parametric equalizer, see

“PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 104.

■ Tone Control (Tone control)

Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your

speakers and headphones.

Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control >

Control (Tone control)

Choices: Defeat, Speaker, Headphone

• Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any

adjustments.

• Select “Speaker” to adjust the bass/treble balance of

your speakers.

• Select “Headphone” to adjust the bass/treble balance of

your headphones.

Front L

Front R

Test Tone

Dynamic Range

LFE Level

Tone Control

Audio Option

Parametric EQ

Front L

Band / Gain

PARAM RESET

EDIT EXIT

Front R

Center

Test Tone

Front L

Freq.

Gain

Band

1.000

125.0Hz

0.0dB

Front R

Center

Test Tone

Speaker

Headphone

Defeat

Bass

Treble

Control

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Bass (Bass control)

Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB

You can adjust three frequency bands: 125Hz, 350Hz,

500Hz.

Treble (Treble control)

Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your

speakers or headphones.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB

You can adjust three frequency bands: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz,

8.0kHz.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

TONE CONTROL is not effective when:

– The THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected.

– MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

■ Audio Option (Audio option)

Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings.

Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option >

Muting Type (Muting type)

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: Full, –20dB

• Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio Delay (Audio delay)

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

PR/SB Select (Presence speakers / surround

back speakers select)

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker

set when playing sources that contain surround back

channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field

programs.

Choices: Presence, Surround Back

• Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

• Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers

when a surround back channel signal is detected in a

CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will

be output from front speakers.

Note

Bass

Treble

Control

Speaker

Freq : 125Hz

Gain : 0.0dB

Bass

Treble

Control

Speaker

Freq : 3.5kHz

Gain : 0.0dB

Muting Type

Audio Delay

PR/SB Select

-20dB

Full

Muting Type

Audio Delay

PR/PB Select

0ms

Muting Type

Audio Delay

PR/SB Select

Surround Back

Presence

English

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this menu to set up basic system parameters.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Select Manual Setup, then press h.

4 Select Basic, then press h.

5 Select the desired parameters, then press h

to access and adjust.

• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set

automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic

menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running

auto setup first.

• You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup

procedure (see page 26).

■ Test Tone (Test tone)

Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set,

Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.

Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone >

Choices: Off, On

• If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• This menu item is also available in the front panel display

system options menu (see page 85).

Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case,

make sure no children are present in the listening room.

■ Speaker Set (Speaker set)

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Set any THX speakers to Small.

Front (Front speakers)

Choices: Large, Small

• Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

• Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.

Center (Center speaker)

Choices: Large, Small, None

• Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The

unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal

to the center speaker.

• Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.

• Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

Manual setup: Basic

AMP

SOURCE

Test Tone

Speaker Distance

Speaker Level

Speaker Set

Sound

Basic

Option

Off

Speaker Set

Speaker Distance

Test Tone

Note

Large

Small

Center

Surround

Front

Large

Small

NoneSurround

Surround Back

Center

Front

SYSTEM OPTIONS

Surround (Surround left/right speakers)

Choices: Large, Small, None

• Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right

speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the

surround speakers. The entire range of the surround

channel signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

• Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass

Out.

• Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers.

This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode

(see page 38) and automatically sets the surround back

speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”.

Surround Back

(Surround back left/right speakers)

Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2,

Large x2, None

• Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back left

speaker.

• Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected with

Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are

directed to the surround back left speaker.

• Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected with

Bass Out.

• Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

• Select “None” if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the

SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals.

Large

Small

NoneSurround Back

Presence

Surround

Center

Front

Note

Small x1

Small x2

Large x1

None

Large x2

Surround Back

Presence

Bass Out

Surround

Center

English

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Presence (Presence speakers)

Choices: None, Yes

• Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers.

This unit directs all presence channel signals to the

front left and right speakers.

• Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers.

When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 66),

Presence is automatically set to “None”.

Bass Out (Bass out)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These low-

frequency signals can be directed to both front left and

right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be used

for both stereo reproduction and sound field programs).

Choices: Both, SWFR, Front

THX recommendation: SWFR

• Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer.

Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both

the subwoofer and front channels, and all other low-

frequency signals are directed in accordance with other

speaker settings.

• Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit

directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in

accordance with other speaker settings.

• Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer.

The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to

the front speakers (even if you have previously set

Front to Small in Speaker Set).

Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz,

110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX)

SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase)

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your

subwoofer.

Choices: Normal, Reverse

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

Note

None

Yes

Surround Back

Presence

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

Surround

Both

SWFR

Front

Surround Back

Presence

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

60Hz

40Hz

80Hz (THX)

90Hz

100Hz

Presence

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

Normal

Reverse

Bass Out

Bass Cross Over

SWFR Phase

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective

channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance

from the main listening position. However, this is not

possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount

of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker

so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the

same time.

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance >

Unit (Unit)

Choices: Meter, Feet

Initial setting:

U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet

Other models: Meter

• Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker Distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

• Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker.

• Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

• Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker.

• Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker.

• Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the

surround back left speaker.

• Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the

surround back right speaker.

• Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left

speaker.

• Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right

speaker.

• Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

• You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in

Speaker Set.

• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the

distance in Surround Back L.

■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left speakers and each speaker selected

in Speaker Set (see page 61).

Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

• Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.

• Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.

• Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker.

• Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left

speaker.

• Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right

speaker.

• Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround

back left speaker.

• Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the

surround back right speaker.

• Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and

presence left speakers.

• Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and

presence right speakers.

• Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.

• To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use the Test

Tone (see page 61).

• This menu item is also available in the front panel display

system options menu (see page 85).

• You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in

Speaker Set.

• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to

the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance

in Surround Back L.

Speaker Distance

Speaker Level

Test Tone

Speaker Set

Front L

Front R

Subwoofer

Unit

Center

Meter

Feet

Front L

Front R

Subwoofer

Unit

Presence R

Notes

Speaker Distance

Presence R

Subwoofer

Speaker Level

Speaker Set

Front R

Center

Front L

English

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This menu adjusts the optional system settings.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Select Manual Setup, then press h.

4 Select Option then press h.

5 Select the desired parameters, then press h

to access and adjust.

6 When finished adjusting parameters, press

ENTER.

■ Display (Display)

Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays.

Manual Setup > Option > Display >

Dimmer (Dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

Video Conv. (Video conversion)

Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite

(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.

This allows you to output converted video signals from the

S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no

S-video or component signals are input. This feature also

converts S-video signals to component signals when no

component signals are input.

Choices: Off, On

• Select “Off” not to convert any signals.

• Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video

and component signals, and to convert S-video signals

to component signals.

When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv.

to “Off”.

• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (composite or S-video) between each component.

• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a

VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer

depending on your VCR.

Short Message (Short message)

Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display.

Choices: Off, On

• Select “Off” to turn off the short message display.

• Select “On” to turn on the short message display.

• The short message display may not display properly depending

on the type of input signal and video monitor used.

• If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not

displayed even if “On” is selected.

Position (Position)

Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the

GUI display.

Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)

• Press k to raise the position of the GUI display.

• Press n to lower the position of the GUI display.

• Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the

right.

•

Press

to shift the position of the GUI display to the left.

Wall Paper (Wallpaper)

Use this feature to select the background when no image is

input from an external source. If you do not want to

display the background, select None.

Choices: None, Yes, Gray Back

If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if

“Yes” is selected.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

Manual setup: Option

AMP

SOURCE

Multi Zone

Display

Input Mode

Memory Guard

Surr.Initialize

Sound

Basic

Option

Display

Surr.Initialize

Multi Zone

Short Message

Position

Dimmer

Video Conv.

Wall Paper

Notes

Note

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ Multi Zone (Multi zone)

Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B

settings.

Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone >

Speaker B (Speaker B)

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: Main, ZoneB

• Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

• Select “ZoneB” if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is

turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES

jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones

and SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier)

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified.

Choices: Internal, External, None

• Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers

through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s

ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.

• Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if

you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s

PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.

• Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2

feature.

• When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting

automatically switches to “None”.

• When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting

automatically switches to “Variable”.

Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume)

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2

Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically

set to “Variable”.

Choices: Fixed, Variable

• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume

level to a standard line level.

• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT

volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote

control.

Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume)

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: Fixed, Variable

• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume

level to a standard line level.

• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT

volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote

control.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

■ Surr.Initialize (Surround initialize)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field program within sound field program groups. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in

blue.

Manual Setup > Option > Surr.Initialize

Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,

MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All

•Press k / n to select the sound field program you want

to initialize, then press ENTER.

• Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field

program parameters.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory

Guard is set to “Guard” (see page 67).

Notes

Display

Surr.Initialize

Input Mode

Multi Zone

Zone2 Amplifier

Zone2 Volume

Speaker B

Zone 3 Volume

Note

Multi Zone

Display

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

SURROUND

All

Input Mode

Memory Guard

Surr.Initialize

English

SYSTEM OPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Input Mode (Input mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

this unit.

Manual Setup > Option > Input Mode

Choices: Auto, Last

• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically

select the last input mode used for the connected

source.

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD.

SUR button.

■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard

Choices: Free, Guard

Select “Guard” to protect:

• DSP program parameters

• All GUI menu items except Memory Guard and

System Memory – Load

This menu item is also available in the front panel display system

options menu (see page 85).

In general, front panel and remote control operations are not

affected by “Guard” functions. However, you cannot adjust the

tone control using TONE CONTROL.

This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite

settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can

save settings such as the following:

• Sound field program parameters

• Speaker settings

• Speaker channel settings

• LFE level

• Dynamic range settings

• Parametric equalizer settings

■ To save settings

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Select System Memory, then press h.

4 Select Save, then press ENTER.

Current displays the current settings of this unit.

5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory

number under which you want to save the

settings, then press h.

“Save:ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of

the window.

6 Press ENTER to save the settings.

Note

Multi Zone

Input Mode

Surr.Initialize

Memory Guard

Auto

Last

Input Mode

Surr.Initialize

Memory Guard

Free

Guard

System Memory

AMP

SOURCE

The Bottom Line

Speaker

SpeakerCH

LFE Level

D-Range

PEQ

A:ON B:OFF

3/4/0.1

0dB

MAX

Reset

Current

Memory 1

Memory 2

SYSTEM OPTIONS

■ To recall settings

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Select System Memory, then press h.

4 Select Load, then press ENTER.

5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory

number you want to recall, then press h.

“Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of

the window.

6 Press ENTER to recall the settings.

Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by

pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control.

When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1?

Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press

MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings.

When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2?

Yes: Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press

MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings.

AMP

SOURCE

The Bottom Line

Speaker

SpeakerCH

LFE Level

D-Range

PEQ

A:ON B:OFF

3/4/0.1

0dB

MAX

Reset

Current

Memory 1

Memory 2

Memory 3

MEMORY1 2

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by

YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the

appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire

functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the

AMP mode.

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the

selected component appears in the display window.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

PRESET

EXIT

TOP

1 2B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

The buttons inside

the dotted lines

control this unit in

any mode

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, INPUT

MODE, the input

selector buttons,

VOLUME +/–,

MUTE, PURE

DIRECT and

STRAIGHT/

EFFECT).

AMP/SOURCE/

Set to AMP to

operate this unit.

Display

window

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX SURROUND SUR. BACK

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

PRESET

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

CHP/INDEX

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

THX SURROUND SUR. BACK

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

AVTV

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

–

PRESET

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

CHP/INDEX

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

THX SURROUND SUR. BACK

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

AVTV

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

–

PRESET

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

RETURN

DISPLAY

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

–

PRESET

EXIT

TOP

1 2B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Component

control area

You can control up

to 14 different

components by

setting appropriate

remote control

codes (see page 80).

A/B buttons and the

input selector buttons

switch the function

of the component

control area below.

Use the A/B

buttons to control

other components

regardless of whether

they are connected to

this unit.

Factory setting:

A...LD player

B...Tape deck

Display

window

AMP/

SOURCE/

Set to

SOURCE to

operate the

component

selected with

an input

selector

button.

Set to TV to

operate the

television

(you must set

the remote

control code

in DTV or

PHONO).

SELECT k / n

switches control to

another component

without changing

the input source on

this unit.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Controlling optional components

(OPTN area)

OPTN is an additional component control area that can be

programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for

programming commands that are to be used only as a part

of a macro function or for components that do not have a

valid remote control code.

To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until

OPTN appears in the display window.

• You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 72

to program buttons operated within this component control

area.

• The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is

selected in the amplifier library (see page 71).

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote Control Code Default Settings

Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses.

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In

this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to set up.

Notes

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(Component

category)

Default YAMAHA

code

A LD 2200

B TAPE 2700, (2701)

PHONO TV –

TUNER TUNER

2600, (0203, 1203,

1358, 2601)

CD CD 2300, (2301)

MULTI CH

INPUT

DVD

2102, (0517, 0566,

0572, 2100, 2101)

V-AUX VCR –

CBL/SAT CABLE –

MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502)

CD-R CD-R 2400

DTV TV –

VCR 1 VCR –

DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807

DVD DVD

2102, (0517, 0566,

0572, 2100, 2101)

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected

component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in

the display window.

If you want to setup for another component, press the input

selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press l / h. You can set a

different type of component.

Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD,

L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner),

L:AMP

, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite),

L:VCR

* The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “2000” in

order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by

entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary.

When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components simultaneously

with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the

alternative codes to operate this unit separately.

4 Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window.

“0000” appears in the display window if no code has been

set.

5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-

digit remote control code for the component

you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

Notes

LEARN

AMP library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see

page 84)

2000

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using the

default code.

ID1

(initial

setting)

2001

To operate this unit using the

default code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features (see page 81).

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K.,

Europe and Australia models

only)

2002

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

2003

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features of other YAMAHA

receivers/amplifiers (see

page 81).

Note

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

6 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if the setting

was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button or

SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4

through 6.

7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

see if you can control your component. If you

can, the remote control code is correct.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more

than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming

codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote

control supplied with the component.

• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions

not included in the basic operations covered by remote

control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not

available. You can program any of the buttons available in

the component control area (see page 69). The buttons can

be programmed independently for each component.

This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote

control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn

most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program

some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to

the operating instructions for the other remote control.)

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select a

source component.

3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

Notes

LEARN

TRANSMIT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

Programming codes from other

remote controls (Learn)

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

TRANSMIT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.

“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” appears in the display window.

6 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window.

“NG” appears in the display window if learning was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5

and 6.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press the input selector button or

SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps

3 through 6.

7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more

than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– When the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– When the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

Notes

LEARN

TRANSMIT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

EXIT

TOP

TRANSMIT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

Notes

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can change the name that appears in the display

window on the remote control if you want to use a

different name than the factory preset. This is useful when

you have set the input selector to control a different

component.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press RE-NAME again.

4 Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z,

1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash),

and space.

(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)

5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

6 Press ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window if renaming was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if renaming was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

If you continuously want to rename another component,

press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select

the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.

7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Changing source names in the

display window

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

RE-NAME

ENTER

Note

ENTER

RE-NAME

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,

when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button

to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.

The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 76).

You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For

details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)

Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD

recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that

component (see page 72) or set a remote control code (see page 70).

When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Using the Macro feature

Macro buttons First Second Third

—

(*1)

—

(CD area) (*2)

—

(MD/TAPE area) (*2)

(CD-R area) (*2)

—

(VCR 1 area) (*2)

(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*2)

(DVD area) (*2)

POWER

SYSTEM

(CD area)

Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order

STANDBY

POWER

SYSTEM

POWER

SYSTEM

PHONO

POWER

SYSTEM

PHONO

TUNER

(*3)

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Macro operations

1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2 Press a macro button.

• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO

ON/OFF to OFF.

• While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not

accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is

complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macros and use the macro

feature to transmit several remote control commands in

sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote

control codes or perform learning operations before

programming the macro. We do not recommend

programming continuous operations such as volume

control in a macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the

selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear

alternately in the display window.

“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a

button other than a macro button.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

TRANSMIT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

MACROMACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

Notes

Note

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode.

To change the selected source component, press

SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will

program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes

the selected component and corresponding component control

area.

5 Press MACRO again when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a

button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and

setup remote control codes.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“CLEAR” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press CLEAR again.

3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

L:DVD (L: name of a component)

Clears all learned functions in the respective

component control area. Press an input selector

button to select the component.

L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control

area.

L:ALL Clears all learned functions.

M:ALL Clears all programmed macros

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote

to the factory settings.

4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing

was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display

window.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting, if you have set remote control codes).

“L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to

complete.

Note

Memory back-up

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries,

set up the remote control code(s) and program any

acquired functions that may have been cleared.

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

MCR 1: DVD

MCR 2: AV POWER

MCR 3: h

Clearing function sets

Note

AMP

SOURCE

CLEAR

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component containing the function

you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.

“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

Notes

CLEAR

Clearing individual functions

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

LEARN

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the button you

want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing

was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 4.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the learning mode.

6 Press LEARN again to exit.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing

was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the macro

programming mode.

5 Press MACRO again to exit.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

Note

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use

this remote to control your other components. Note that some

buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use

the input selector buttons to select the component you want to

operate. The remote control automatically switches to the

appropriate control mode for that component.

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control

code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.

These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only.

Controlling each component

DVD player/

DVD recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner

1 AV P OW E R

Power

VCR power

Power

2 TV POWER

TV power

Power

TV power

3 TV VOL +

TV volume +

Volume +

TV volume +

TV VOL –

TV volume –

Volume –

TV volume –

CH +

TV channel +

Channel +

Channel + Channel +

TV channel +

PRESET +

CH –

TV channel –

Channel –

Channel – Channel –

TV channel –

PRESET –

TV INPUT/

A/B/C/D/E

TV input

Input

TV input

Direction A/B

A/B/C/D/E

TV MUTE

TV mute

Mute

TV mute

4 TITLE

Title Title Title Title

5 MENU

Menu Menu Menu

6 ENTER

Menu enter Menu select Menu select

k Menu up Menu up Menu up

n Menu down Menu down Menu down

l Menu left Menu left Menu left

h Menu right Menu right Menu right

7 RETURN

Return Return Return Return

8 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

Preset stations (1-8)

9 ll

backward

VCR search

backward

VCR search

backward

FREQ

hh Search forward Search forward

VCR search

forward

VCR search

forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward

EON

b Skip backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip backward Skip backward Direction back

PTY MODE

a Skip forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

PTY START

REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

VCR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop

VCR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause

VCR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

h Play Play

VCR play

Play Play Play Play

0 AUDIO

Audio Audio

A DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display

B ENTER

Enter Enter/recall

Enter/

numeric button

TRANSMIT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

EXIT

TOP

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

SPEAKERSMEMORY

EXIT

TOP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit

to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.

• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second

and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.

• A video monitor for the second room.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit

in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult

with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center

for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your

requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the

CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products,

you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six

YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

■ System configuration and connections example

Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 66).

• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the

amplifier in the second/third room.

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third

room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.

Zone 2/Zone 3 connections

OUT

CONTROL OUT

This unit

Notes

REMOTE OUT

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

MONITOR OUT

SP OUT

REMOTE 1 IN

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT

REMOTE 2 IN

MAIN

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT

Infrared emitter

DVD player

(or other component)

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second room Third roomMain room

SYSTEM

This unit

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

Using this unit’s internal amplifier

To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 66).

The supplied remote control can be used to control

Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and

control components located in the main room directly

from the second/third room regardless of the listening

condition in the main room.

■ To enable Zone mode on the remote

control

You will be able to switch the remote control mode from

one room to another, and use the input selector,

STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and

VOLUME +/– to control the selected room.

1 Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to

SOURCE/REMOTE.

2 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in

“Setting remote control codes” on page 70.

3 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”.

4 Press ENTER.

“2000” appears in the display window.

5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”.

For details, see page 71.

6 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.

The remote control will be able to operate this unit

from Zone 2 or Zone 3.

■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3

1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display

“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window.

2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or

Zone 3 power on.

–

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2

Second room

This unit

Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3

SOURCE/

REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPEDVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

CD-R

TUNER

DVR/

VCR2

ENTER

LEARN

SELECT

English

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

3 Press an input selector button to select the

input source you want to listen to in the

second/third room.

The display window shows “2: name of selected

input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote

control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to

Zone 2/Zone 3.

4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone

3 by using the input selector, STANDBY,

SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/–

buttons.

* VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or

Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu (see

page 66).

5 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/

Zone 3 mode.

• The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are

always the same.

• “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only

when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed

■ Turning this unit to either on or standby

SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently

depending on the selected mode that appears on the

display window.

• When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you

can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby

individually.

• When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or

“2002” (see page 71) is selected as the amplifier library

(L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and

Zone 3 to on/standby simultaneously.

“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER

or STANDBY is pressed.

■ Special considerations for DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to

send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will

only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers).

Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need

to be made when playing DTS encoded discs.

For DVDs encoded with DTS

Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the

second/third room.

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-

channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby

Digital soundtrack.

For CDs encoded in DTS

To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/

Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

Note

Notes

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

EXIT

TOP

PURE DIRECT

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

LCD display

SYSTEM POWER/

STANDBY

Normal mode

Name of component

Turns the main unit

on/standby

Zone 2 mode

“Zone2” or “2:name of

component”

Turns Zone 2 to on/

standby

Zone 3 mode

“Zone3” or “3:name of

component”

Turns Zone 3 to on/

standby

System mode

“SYSTM”

Turns everything (the

main unit, Zone 2,

Zone 3) on/standby

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the

front panel display.

This menu offers additional operations to adjust and

customize the way this unit operates. Change the settings

to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode.

2 On the front panel, while holding down

STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.

3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired

operation.

The name of the selected operation appears in the

front panel display.

4 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the

setting.

5 Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting

This unit enters the standby mode.

The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of

this unit.

■ SP IMP. (Speaker impedance)

Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that

of your speakers.

Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN

• Select “6ΩMIN” for speakers that are 6 ohm or higher.

• Select “8ΩMIN” for speakers that are 8 ohm or higher.

■ PRESET (Factory preset)

Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial

factory settings with the exception of System Memory and

Auto Setup settings.

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this

unit’s parameters.

• Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters.

■ REMOTE (Remote control ID)

Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition

(see page 71).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library

code is set to “2000” or “2001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library

code is set to “2002” or “2003”.

■ FAN MODE (Fan operation mode)

Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan.

Choices: AUTO, CONT

• Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically

according to the temperature of this unit.

• Select “CONT” to set the fan to operate continuously

regardless of the temperature of this unit.

■ TU (Tuner frequency step)

(Asia and General models only)

Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the

frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South

America.

• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

Advanced setup menu

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STANDBY

/ON

PROGRAM

English

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access

most GUI menu system option parameters without using a

video monitor.

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to

enter the menu.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then

press ENTER to enter the selected item.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the

parameter you want to adjust.

5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to

change the setting of the item you want to

adjust.

6 Press DISPLAY to exit.

If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return

to the previously selected menu item.

■ AUTO SETUP

Front panel display system options menu

EXIT

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

2, 6

3-5

Item Sub-items Features

SETUP

AUTO

RELOAD

• Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup

adjusts.

• Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu (see

page 27).

NATURAL

FLAT

FRONT

• Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup

uses.

• Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI

menu (see page 28).

START [ENTER] • Use to activate the auto setup procedure.

• Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 28).

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

■ MANUAL SETUP

1 BASIC MENU

Item Sub-items Features

A)SPEAKER SET

FRONT;;;;SMALL

CENTER;;;;;SML

SURR.LR;;;;SML

SURR.B;;;SMLx2

PRESENCE;;NONE

BASS OUT;;SWFR

SWFR C/O;;80Hz

SWFR PHASE;NRM

• Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the

speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the

cross over frequency.

• Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu (see

page 61).

B)SP DISTANCE

UNIT;;;;meters

FRONT L;;;3.0m

FRONT R;;;3.0m

CENTER;;;;3.0m

SURR L;;;;3.0m

SURR R;;;;3.0m

SB L;;;;;;2.1m

SB R;;;;;;2.1m

SWFR;;;;;;3.0m

PRES L;;;;3.0m

PRES R;;;;3.0m

FRONT L;;;10.0

FRONT R;;;10.0

CENTER;;;;10.0

SURR L;;;;10.0

SURR R;;;;10.0

SB L;;;;;;;7.0

SB R;;;;;;;7.0

SWFR;;;;;;10.0

PRES L;;;;10.0

PRES R;;;;10.0

• Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

• Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu

(see page 64).

C)SP LEVEL

FR-----||-----

C-----||-----

FL-----||-----

SL-----||-----

SBL-----||-----

SBR-----||-----

SR-----||-----

SWFR-----||-----

PR.R-----||-----

PR.L-----||-----

• Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

• Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu (see

page 64).

D)TEST TONE

TEST TONE;;OFF

• Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels.

• Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu (see

page 61).

English

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

2 SOUND MENU

3 INPUT MENU

Item Sub-items Features

A)LFE LEVEL

SP LFE;;;;;;;0

HP LFE;;;;;;;0

• Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby

Digital or DTS signals.

• Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu (see

page 58).

B)D.RANGE

SP D.R;;;;;MAX

HP D.R;;;;;MAX

• Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS

signals.

• Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu (see

page 58).

C)TONE CON FRQ

BASS FRQ.350Hz

TRBL FRQ.xxkHz

• Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and

headphones.

• Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu (see

page 59).

D)AUDIO OPTION

A.MUTE;;;;MUTE

A.DELAY;;;;;;0

PRch >SBch

• Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.

• Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu (see

page 60).

Item Sub-items Features

A)I/O ASSIGN

C.V[A] DVD

C.V[B] DTV

C.V[C]CBL/SAT

OUT(1)MD/TAPE

OUT(2) CD-R

IN (3) CD

IN (4) DVD

IN (5) DTV

IN (6)CBL/SAT

IN (7) CD

IN (8) DVD

IN (9)DVR/VCR2

• Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

• Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu (see

page 56).

B)INPUT TRIM

PHONO;;;;;;;0

• Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

• Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu (see

page 56).

C)INPUT MODE

>AUTO LAST

• Selects the initial input mode of the source.

• Corresponds to Input Mode in the GUI menu (see

page 67).

D)INPUT RENAME

DVD ._DVD

• Changes the name of the input.

• Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu (see

page 57).

E)MULTI CH IN

>6CH 8CH

DVD ->FRNT

• Selects the number of audio channels input through

the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

• Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu

(see page 57).

FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS

4 OPTION MENU

Item Sub-items Features

A)DISPLAY SET

DIMMER;;;;;;;0

WALL PAPER;;ON

SHORT MSG. ON

V CONV.;;;;;ON

• Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.

• Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu (see

page 65).

B)MEMORY GUARD

MEM.GUARD;;OFF

• Locks the menu parameter settings.

• Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu (see

page 67).

C)SURR.INI

PRESS DSP Key

Cinema DSP

• Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound

field programs.

• Corresponds to Surr.Initialize in the GUI menu (see

page 66).

D)ZONE SET

SP B;;;;;;MAIN

• Customizes the Zone B parameters.

• Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see

page 66).

E)ZONE2 SET

OUT VOL;;;VAR.

ZONE2 AMP;;EXT

• Customizes the Zone 2 parameters (U.S.A., Canada,

U.K., Europe and Australia models only).

• Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see

page 66).

F)ZONE3 SET

OUT VOL;;;VAR.

• Customizes the Zone 3 parameters (U.S.A., Canada,

U.K., Europe and Australia models only).

• Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see

page 66).

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live

instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of

the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these

reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,

and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall.

Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room. The following

parameters are not always found in every program.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TOP on the remote control.

3 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h.

4 Select the desired sound field program, then

press h to access and adjust.

You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set

to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set

Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67).

■

Resetting parameters to the factory values

To reset all parameters

Use Surr.Initialize (see page 66).

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the

power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power

supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if

the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values

will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the

parameter value again.

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

Vienna

Freiburg

Munich

Vienna

Freiburg

Init. Delay

Room Size

DSP Level

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP Level (DSP level)

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect

level relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control Range: –6 dB – +3 dB

■ Init. Delay (Initial delay)

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting

the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the

farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.

Control Range: 1

– 99 ms

■ Room Size (Room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Source Sound

Early

Reflections

Time Time Time

Initial delay Initial delay Initial delay

Sound Source

Reflection Face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Time

Source Sound

Early

Reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound Source

English

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Liveness (Liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The

LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

Control Range: 0 – 10

■ Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of

the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround

channels are used.

Control Range: 1 – 49 ms

■ Sur.Room Size (Surround room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control Range: 0 – 10

■ SB Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back

sound field.

Control Range: 1 – 49 ms

■ SB Room Size (Surround back room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.

Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ SB Liveness (Surround back liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.

Control Range: 0 – 10

Source Sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small Reflected

Sound

Large Reflected

Sound

Small value = 0

Large value = 10

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Rev.Time (Reverberation time)

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range.

Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter

the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems.

Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 s

■ Rev.Delay (Reverberation delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control Range: 0 – 250 ms

■ Rev.Level (Reverberation level)

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control Range: 0 – 100%

Reverberation

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Source Sound

Reverberation time

Sound Source

Short

Reverberation

Long

Reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early Reflections

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Source Sound

Reverberation

Reverberation timeReverberation

delay

Time

Source Sound

Level

Reverberation level

Time

English

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift)

Function: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front

and center channel elements to the presence speakers.

Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.

Choices: 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 0.

For 7ch Stereo

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.

Control Range: 0 – 100%

■ Center Level (Center level)

■ Surround L Level (Surround left level)

■ Surround R Level (Surround right level)

■ Sur. Back Level (Surround back level)

■ Presence L Level (Presence left level)

■ Presence R Level (Presence right level)

For PLIIx Music and PLII Music

■ Panorama

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: Off/On, initial setting is Off.

■ Dimension

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).

■ Center Width

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the

center image towards the front left and right speakers.

Control Range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.

For Neo:6 Music

■ Center Image

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control Range: 0.0 – 1.0

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ Decode Type (Decoder type)

For MOVIE THEATER

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6

For THX Cinema

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6

For SURROUND Standard

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard.

Choices: Pro Logic / PLII Movie / PLII Music / PLII Game / PLIIx Movie / PLIIx Music / PLIIx Game / Neo:6

Cinema / Neo:6 Music

For SURROUND Enhanced

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced.

Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6

TROUBLESHOOTING

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

13–16

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use

it normally.

—

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

17–22

The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.

—

The input mode is set to “DTS” or

“ANALOG”.

Set the input mode to “AUTO”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,

MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

The input mode is set to “ANALOG”

while playing a source encoded with a

DTS signal.

Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being received from a source component

e.g.: a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

—

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Turn on the video conversion function.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect balance settings in the GUI

menu.

Adjust the Speaker Level settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

7ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

surround speakers.

The output level of the surround speakers

is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers.

Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and

right speakers.

A monaural or stereo source is being

played with STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound

fields.

—

No sound from the

surround back

speakers.

Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select.

Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to

“None”, surround back speakers are automatically set

to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the

surround left and right speakers.

Surround Back is set to “None” in Speaker

Set.

Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or

“Large x2”.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal is being played.

Select “SWFR” or “Both”.

Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front”

when a 2-channel source is being played.

Select “Both”.

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

English

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator on

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations

instructions for your component.

—

The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while playing a

record.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to this unit through

an MC-head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to this

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

17–21

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

17–21

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. Select “Free”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and

then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio-

frequency equipment,

or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or

radio-frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and

then turn it back on.

—

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats and other electrical

equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

—

English

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.

When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO

area, set it to the TV position.

—

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer.

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

The remote control

does not “learn” new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

GLOSSARY

100

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. It

provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels

(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.

An additional channel especially for bass effects, called

LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the

system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to

minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range

channels and the precise sound orientation generated

using digital sound processing provide listeners with a

previously unheard of excitement and realism.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using

a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital

EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with

Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,

you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving

sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “fly-

around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2

front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2

surround left and right channels (instead of only 1

surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology).

Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel

sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or

7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-

channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a

Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/

24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video for music programs and motion picture

soundtracks on DVD-video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,

left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus

an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-

channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround

back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation comparable to

digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;

“Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema

mode” for movies.

GLOSSARY

Audio formats

101

English

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and

audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room

of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects without any surround speakers by using

virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

Sound field programs

102

GLOSSARY

■ ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering

studios.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies

established by the world-renowned film production

company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’

personal desire to make your experience of the film

soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home

theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director

intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres

called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back

in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions.

This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto

Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for

playback in a small home theatre environment.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to

accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre

environment into the home, correcting the tonal and

spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX

indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in

Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

Adaptive decorrelation

In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers

help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but

in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This

can make the surround speakers sound like headphones

that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround

sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you

move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive

decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time

and phase relationship with respect to the other surround

channel. This expands the listening position and creates –

with only two speakers – the same spacious surround

experience as in a movie theatre.

Re-equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively

bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment

in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be

played back in large movie theatres using very different

professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the

correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a

small home environment.

Timbre matching

The human ear changes our perception of sound

depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a

movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so

that the surround information is all around you. In a home

theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of

your head. The timbre matching feature filters the

information going to the surround speakers so that they

more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound

coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless

panning between the front and surround speakers.

Audio information

103

English

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ THX Select

Before any home theatre component can be THX Select

certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of

quality and performance tests. Only then can a product

feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that

the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you

superb performance for many years to come. THX Select

requirements cover every aspect of the product including

power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and

operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the

digital and analog domain.

■ THX Surround EX

THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint

development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.

In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are

able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added

during the mixing of the program. This channel, called

Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in

addition to the currently available front left, front center,

front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer

channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity

for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings

more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization

than ever before.

Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital

Surround EX technology, when released into the home

consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the

packaging. A list of movies created using this technology

can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A

list of available DVD software titles encoded with this

technology can be found at www.thx.com.

Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX

Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,

faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.

This product may also engage the THX Surround EX

mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is

not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the

information delivered to the Surround Back channel will

be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing

depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of

the individual listener.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and P

R signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

Video signal information

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

104

This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the

Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the

frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to

match your listening environment. YPAO uses a

combination of the following three parameters

(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise

adjustment of the frequency characteristics.

■ Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■ Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

105

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 130 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[Australia, China, Asia, Korea and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................180 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General

models]

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W

• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................190 W

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02%

CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[U.K., Europe and Australia models] ....................................81 dB

[Other models].......................................................................86 dB

CD (250 mV) to Front L/R .................................................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency..................................................350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................3.5 kHz

• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level/Output Impedance

REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT

[U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and

Australia models].................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC

• Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model]..................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... 0.2 W

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ................................. 0.33 W

[Other models] .................................................................. 0.15 W

•AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

[China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”)

• Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs)

SPECIFICATIONS

Documenttranscriptie

GB MITSUBISHI REOC REPLAYTV REX ROADSTAR 0375 0641, 0643 0068 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI THOMAS THOMSON 0027 0027 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 RX-V2500 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WD64260 RX-V2500 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER'S MANUAL MODE D'EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model .............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................48 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 48 For music sources .................................................... 51 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 8 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................52 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 52 SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................53 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................69 Before connecting components................................ 17 Connecting video components................................. 18 Connecting audio components................................. 21 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 23 Connecting the power cable..................................... 24 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25 Turning on the power............................................... 25 Control area ............................................................. 69 Setting remote control codes ................................... 70 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) ................................................................. 72 Changing source names in the display window....... 74 Using the Macro feature .......................................... 75 Clearing function sets .............................................. 77 Clearing individual functions .................................. 78 Controlling each component.................................... 80 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26 Introduction.............................................................. 26 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26 Starting the setup ..................................................... 27 Confirming the results ............................................. 29 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17 SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12 BASIC OPERATION Speaker placement ................................................... 12 Speaker connections ................................................ 13 Changing parameter settings ................................... 55 Input Select .............................................................. 56 Manual setup: Sound ............................................... 58 Manual setup: Basic................................................. 61 Manual setup: Option .............................................. 65 System Memory....................................................... 67 PREPARATION ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) .....................81 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 81 Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 82 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32 Advanced setup menu.............................................. 84 Front panel display system options menu................ 85 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TUNING ................................................................ 40 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......89 Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 40 Presetting stations .................................................... 41 Selecting preset stations........................................... 43 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43 Receiving RDS stations ........................................... 44 Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 44 PTY SEEK function ................................................ 45 EON function........................................................... 46 What is a sound field? ............................................. 89 Changing parameter settings ................................... 89 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................90 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................95 GLOSSARY.........................................................100 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECORDING ....................................................... 47 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 32 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 33 Additional operations............................................... 34 Selecting input modes.............................................. 39 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................84 Audio formats ........................................................ 100 Sound field programs............................................. 101 Audio information ................................................. 102 Video signal information ....................................... 103 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION .............................................104 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................105 English 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Surround: 130 W + 130 W Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi channel input ◆ Short message function ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and learning/macro capability ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX Select ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability (U.K. and Europe models only) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 2 GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03) Power cable Speaker terminal wrench Optimizer microphone 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) AM loop antenna SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea, Asia and General models) SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV Indoor FM antenna (U.K., Europe and Australia models) A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Installing batteries in the remote controls 2 1 3 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. • Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash, or its light or display window become dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English 1 Notes on batteries 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (U.S.A. model) VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE TUNER EDIT MAN'L/AUTO FM SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO PROGRAM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 MD/TAPE CD-R AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR/ VCR2 YPAO EFFECT REC OUT/ZONE 2 A B C D OPTIMIZER MIC E F G VIDEO AUX PHONES H I J K L RDS MODE /FREQ EON M PTY SEEK MODE O P N START Q R (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 6 to 7 second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 3 PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when turned on (see page 37). 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. 4 6 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO” indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off). 9 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. A SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the corresponding button is pressed. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39). D REC OUT/ZONE 2 (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source you are listening to or watching in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the source you record are always identical REC OUT (other models) Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder independent of the source you are listening to or watching. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. E OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 26). F A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). G PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. H PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the front left and right channels. K ZONE ON/OFF (ZONE 2) (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Turns Zone 2 on or to the standby mode (see page 83). L TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 34). M PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). INTRODUCTION B MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). N STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. ■ U.K. and Europe models only O RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data service) and/or the frequency display mode (see page 44). P EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see page 46). Q PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). R PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. I VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from an external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. English J ZONE ON/OFF (MAIN) (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Turns the main unit on or to the standby mode (see page 83). To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 69. 1 2 3 E POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 SELECT 5 6 7 8 PRESET + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV MUTE A B TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN F G H 6 LIGHT button Press to light up remote control buttons and display window. I 7 A/B/C/D/E Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode. 8 TOP Selects the graphical user interface (GUI) mode for your video monitor. J K L 9 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI menu items. M 0 RETURN Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel display menu mode. TV A/B/C/D/E 9 0 AMP + DISPLAY N O P Q R A Sound field program/Numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when this unit is in tuner mode. EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. B MEMORY 1/2 Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO settings or additional preset stations (see page 68). S C MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. t X MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP C D OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. 5 PRESET +/– Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner mode. SYSTEM POWER 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. U V W D MACRO Use to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see page 75). E STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. F SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. G INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 39). 2 Transmission indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. H SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. 6 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS W LEARN Used to set up the remote control code or program functions from other remote controls (see page 72). J SELECT k / n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. ■ U.K. and Europe models only K VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. FREQ/RDS Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display (see page 44). L AMP/SOURCE/TV Selects the component you want to control with the remote control. AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit. SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component selected with an input selector button. TV: Set to this position to operate the television. To set the remote control codes for components, see page 70. M MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. N PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37). X RDS tuning buttons (Available when this unit is in tuner mode) INTRODUCTION I MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically (see page 46). PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 45). O EXIT Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode. P NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 37). Q DISPLAY Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode. R STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. S EXTD. SUR Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software. T SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the corresponding button is pressed. U RE-NAME Used to change the input source name in the display window (see page 74). English V CLEAR Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn, macro and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 77). 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD DTV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER EDIT CD MAN'L/AUTO FM SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO TONE CONTROL AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC Approximately 6 m (20 feet) EFFECT VIDEO AUX PHONES 30 30 ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperature – dusty places 8 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display V–AUX MATRIX DISCRETE DIGITAL PL PL EX PL x DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 NIGHT VIRTUAL 96 24 THX PCM 0 A 3 4 CBL/SAT SP AB 5 DTV 6 DVD MD/TAPE 7 8 CD–R CD TUNER PHONO PS PTY RT CT EON AUTO STEREO YPAO PTY HOLD MEMORY TUNED HiFi DSP SILENT CINEMA ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 SLEEP B 9 ft mS dB C D E F G P (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and H dB MUTE VOLUME 96/24 L C R INTRODUCTION 2 1 LFE SL SB SR I J K L M NO Q (U.K. and Europe models only) Australia models only) 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. A PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 2 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. B SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Presence DSP sound field Left surround DSP sound field Listening position Right surround DSP sound field Surround/surround back DSP sound field 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. C VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 38). D Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. E SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. 5 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. F SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 34). 6 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. G Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 7 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 9 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. I MEMORY indicator Blinks to show a station can be stored. J TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. K MUTE indicator Blinks while the MUTE function is on. English 0 THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. H HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. O Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 26) or Speaker Level setting (page 64). P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on. Q RDS indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL TUNER 3 VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO MD/TAPE 4 AUDIO 7 AUDIO L R 8 REMOTE L R 9 0 CONTROL OUT 2 1 IN (PLAY) DVD FM ANT 56 INTRODUCTION 1 1 2 AC IN IN OUT IN OUT +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE CD-R 75Ω UNBAL. R DTV OUT (REC) IN (PLAY) CD GND – A – + + – B – + + – – + + L RS-232C CBL/ SAT GND FRONT CD-R CENTER DVD IN AM ANT – + OUT (REC) VCR 1 DTV OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR CBL/SAT AC OUTLETS FRONT CD PHONO R SURROUND IN SURROUND L R DVD L L R DVR/VCR 2 FRONT (6 ch)/ SB (8 ch) DTV OUT L R SUB WOOFER CENTER + CD CBL/ SAT SURROUND ZONE 2 R + – – + SINGLE (SB) DVD L – MONITOR OUT R DVR/ VCR 2 COAXIAL ZONE 3 MONITOR DIGITAL INPUT OUTPUT A B SUB WOOFER L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 CENTER MULTI CH INPUT (U.S.A. model) C 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 21 for details. 2 Antenna terminals See page 23 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 20 for connection information. 4 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 5 Speaker terminal wrench hook Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use. 6 RS-232C terminal (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. Consult you dealer for details. 7 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 81 for details. E F 0 AC INLET Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 24). A DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details. B ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 81 for details. C MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 19 for connection information. D PRE OUT jacks See page 22 for connection information. E Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. F PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 13 for connection information. English 8 CONTROL OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) These are control expansion terminals for commercial use. D 9 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 24). 11 SPEAKER SETUP + SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below. PL PR C FR FL 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. SR Subwoofer SBL SBR The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. More than 30 cm (12 in) . 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) y The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended by the ITU-R (see page 102). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX. Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 12 Presence speakers (PR and PL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Note Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 60). SPEAKER SETUP ■ Di-pole speaker layout Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 25). If you will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for speaker impedance. • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is disconnected from the power source. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. PREPARATION SL Speaker connections A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 10 mm (3/8 in) 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Loosen the knob. The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for loosening or tightening knobs. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. English 13 SPEAKER SETUP 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Speaker terminal wrench 5 4 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 1 3 2 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. ■ Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 14 SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 7 3 8 6 5 Front speakers (A) Right Left Speaker layout Center speaker 1 2 R 3 – A – + + – B – + + – – + + FRONT Front speakers (B) 4 PREPARATION Subwoofer with built-in amplifier L CENTER – + FRONT SURROUND L R R SURROUND L L R L R SUB WOOFER CENTER + R + – – + L SINGLE (SB) R – L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS PRESENCE/ZONE 2 SINGLE (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 60). • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. English 15 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals ■ CENTER terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the FRONT A or B terminals. Connect a center speaker to these terminals. Note ■ SUBWOOFER jack The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display. ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. Bi-wired connection Note (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see page 66). + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R This unit 16 L CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 65), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. PREPARATION ■ Cable indications ■ Video jacks S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. S VIDEO VIDEO Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 65) This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. English 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Coaxial out Audio out Optical out C DVD player Video out R O VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R L DVD Video monitor DVD Video in COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR DVD DVD MONITOR OUT MONITOR (U.S.A. model) 18 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign: Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input AUDIO R SURROUND SURROUND PREPARATION FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) AUDIO L IN (PLAY) R L DVD MD/TAPE DTV SUB WOOFER CENTER SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT OUT (REC) IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT CD-R IN R L Subwoofer out R L R L VCR 1 R L CD Center out Center out Multi-format player/ Front External decoder out Subwoofer out Surround out Surround back out IN DVR/ VCR 2 Multi-format player/ Surround out R External decoder L Front out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. English 19 CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Audio out Cable TV or satellite tuner Video out O VIDEO R L R L AUDIO CBL/ SAT IN VCR 1 OUT COMPONENT VIDEO CBL/SAT DTV CBL/ SAT DVR/ VCR 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) R C Video in Video out L Audio in DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or camcorder, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX L R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-video out 20 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components O Optical in Optical in MD recorder or tape deck CD recorder Audio in Audio out L R L Audio in R L R PREPARATION R O Audio out L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE L IN (PLAY) MD/TAPE CD-R OUT (REC) GND CD IN (PLAY) CD-R OUT (REC) CD PHONO CD DIGITAL INPUT R (U.S.A. model) L R Audio out O C L Audio out Optical out Coaxial out CD player GND Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. English 21 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set to “Zone B” (see page 66), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. FRONT 1 L R SURROUND 2 L R SUB WOOFER CENTER 3 4 5 SINGLE (SB) R L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the correct speakers. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 61). 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Indoor FM antenna (included) 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. AM loop antenna (included) Notes TUNER 75Ω UNBAL. GND AM ANT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR DVD DTV • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) CBL/ SAT MONITOR OUT Ground (GND terminal) 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 PREPARATION FM ANT Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 3 4 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the lead wire and remove it. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. Unit: mm (in) Lead wire Clamp Clamp Insert the wire into the slot 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 5 Snap the cover into place. English 23 CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an AC wall outlet. CAUTION AC OUTLETS Do not use other AC power cables. Use the one provided. Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (U.S.A. model) U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W VOLTAGE SELECTOR ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model....... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ........................... AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz ■ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. (General model) 24 CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. 1 Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.–8ΩMIN” appears on the front panel display. 1 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE MEMORY FM/AM PROGRAM CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD SILENT CINEMA AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO EFFECT REC OUT /ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT PHONES VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) SP IMP.-8 MIN 2 SYSTEM Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the impedance of your speakers. You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms. POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 PREPARATION SPEAKERS A SELECT 3 AMP Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. Note + 1 Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced menu (see page 84). + + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote controls) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM CAUTION POWER STANDBY /ON If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms before turning on the power. Front panel 2 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Note Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control) to enter the standby mode. English 25 AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV Notes CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 30. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. Wiring Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Distance Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Size Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. Equalizing Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. Level Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 26 REC OUT /ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 4 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu, then press h. y Information If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer 1 2 Switch on this unit and video monitor. Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring, Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then press h. Wiring Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. PREPARATION 5 Skip Wiring Skip Check Distance Check Distance Size Size Equalizing Wiring Distance Distance Skip Size Skip Size Check Equalizing Check: Natural Level Check: Flat Equalizing Check: Front Level AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE Size TV Equalizing Skip Level Check Stereo/Surround Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option 6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select: Check System Memory Skip To automatically check and adjust the selected item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. y 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup, then press h. ENTER When using THX speakers, select Skip for Size and make sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set (page 61) and that “80Hz (THX)” is selected in Bass Cross Over (page 63). ENTER Input Select Information Auto Setup Setup Menu System Memory Setup Type Audio Info. Start English Manual Setup 27 AUTO SETUP For Equalizing, press k / n to select: Skip To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat” setting sounds a little harsh. Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. 7 Once you have selected the desired setting, press l to move back to Setup Menu. Information 8 Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size Press n to select Setup Type, then select: Auto To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. Step Information Setup Menu 28 Setup Type Auto Start Step 9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER. Loud test tones are output from each speaker and “Measuring” appears during the auto setup procedure. Setup Menu Setup Type Start Press ENTER • To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode, press k to retry the procedure, l to cancel auto setup. • If an error message appears during testing, refer to “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto setup procedure. AUTO SETUP Confirming the results If you set Setup Type to Step. The results are displayed individually after each analysis. You can confirm the results of each analysis. Distance If you set Setup Type to Auto. The results are displayed after all items have been analysed. Setup Menu Setup Type Start Size Retry Detail Next Equalizing Level Result Retry Exit Detail Setup PREPARATION • Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next menu item. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. Measurement Over Successfully • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. Exit After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item are displayed. • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 30. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. y If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu, press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust, then press ENTER. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external amplifier. • In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. English 29 AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. • Select at least one setup menu item. Memory Guard! This setting is protected. • Remove the protection setting for auto setup (see page 67). During auto setup Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. Error message Cause Remedy E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B. • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E02:No Surr. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners, or move them away from this unit. E06:Check Surr. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround back speaker(s). E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled because a setting that affects auto setup was changed during the procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. • Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure again. 30 AUTO SETUP After auto setup The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. Warning message Cause Remedy W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when they are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections. W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • • • • W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the measurement results of wiring (only occurs when the wiring measurement procedure is skipped). • Check the speaker connections. PREPARATION Readjust the speaker installation. Check the speaker connections. Use speakers of similar quality. Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. English 31 PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 1 3 4 6 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. SPEAKERS A B A SPEAKERS B or +10 ENT. VOLUME Front panel INPUT Remote control PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON When bi-wiring, select both A and B. SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VCR 1 S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX 4 (U.S.A. model) 3 7 1 TV MUTE SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN TV INPUT EXIT MENU MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AMP + + SOURCE TV VOL – CH VOL – – 1 TV INPUT 1 MUSIC ENTERTAIN Front panel MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 7 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 FREQ/RDS EON ENT. 7 3 Remote control The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME TV V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 EXIT TITLE MENU CBL/SAT DTV DVD DVD PURE DIRECT Press STANDBY/ON (set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP then press SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. Selected input source Front panel CD TUNER AMP PHONO dB VOLUME AUTO L R Input mode Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or + SYSTEM POWER or SOURCE VOL – TV Remote control Front panel 32 CD–R 5 STANDBY /ON 2 MD/TAPE SP A MUTE TOP DVD AUDIO A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE CD-R DVR/VCR2 STRAIGHT DISPLAY STEREO + MD/TAPE VCR 1 DTV NIGHT SELECT 6 CBL/SAT V-AUX or EFFECT CBL/SAT DTV MULTI CH IN TUNER PURE DIRECT ENTER V-AUX CD PHONO INPUT MUTE TOP TITLE RETURN 4 Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Remote control PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 48 for details about sound field programs. Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT PROGRAM or STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 7 8 THX 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT M MODE CBL/SAT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD VCR 1 SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO 9 Front panel 0 A SPEAKERS B +10 REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX ENT. Remote control (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Note When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX recommendation). Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM DialNorm;;+4dB DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD HiFi DSP Hall in Munich TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L BASIC OPERATION V–AUX R Program name English 33 PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation Additional operations AMP + + + CH VOL – – SOURCE TV VOL – AMP/SOURCE/TV ■ To adjust the tone TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MOVIE Sound field program buttons PROGRAM A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 AMP SOURCE TV V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE MOVIE Notes A SPEAKERS B +10 CD–R TONE CONTROL You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. ENT. CD HiFi DSP Hall in Munich TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If headphones are connected to this unit, the TONE CONTROL setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones (see page 59). ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. MUTE The MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. y You can adjust the muting level (see page 60). ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 34 PLAYBACK ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. Off (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. BASIC OPERATION ■ Enjoying multi-channel software in 6.1/7.1 channel surround Decoders (select with l / h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. y If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multichannel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 62), the surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD. SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback. • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is pressed in the following cases: – When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 62). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 62). • “PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 62). EXTD. SUR 8 To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed. Auto (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. Notes English 35 PLAYBACK ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR. ENHANCED programs. 6 Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs. THX 4 or 5 Press SELECT on the remote control to select the decoder. SELECT 7 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. When you select the SUR. STANDARD program PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. 36 PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. STANDARD MOVIE When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE THEATER or THX program Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. y • You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 89). • You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message display. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 62). PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The button lights up and the front panel display automatically goes out. ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. NIGHT PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT AUDIO or Remote control Front panel Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 34) and GUI menu (page 53) settings are not effective. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the short message – adjusting GUI menu parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. BASIC OPERATION To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press l / h to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. ENTER Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. English 37 PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. STEREO PROGRAM or Front panel MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine images from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Audio sources Remote control 2ch Stereo PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources Note You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or Both is selected in Bass Out. ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 38 Note If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. PLAYBACK ■ Displaying information about the input source Selecting input modes You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signal you want to use. 1 Select the input source. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD INPUT or 1 Press TOP on the remote control. 2 Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info. The following information appears in the display. Auto Setup System Memory Front panel 2 Remote control Audio Info Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. SYSTEM Front panel V–AUX DVR/VCR2 POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN Remote control VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A DVD AUTO CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Input mode AUTO DTS ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “?” appears. Channel Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Dialogue Dialogue normalization information for Dolby Digital signals. Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “– – –” appears. Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. BASIC OPERATION or POWER Analog --2/0/----------- Format TRANSMIT INPUT MODE Format Sampling Channel Bitrate Dialogue Flag1 Flag2 * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 67). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note English If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. 39 TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning PRESET/ TUNING PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R YPAO (U.S.A. model) 1 OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT PHONES MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU AUTO TUNED If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 REC OUT /ZONE 2 DVD PROGRAM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO DTV ■ Manual tuning ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE CD–R TUNER CBL/SAT SP A When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT SPEAKERS VCR 1 A~~AM~1530 kHz 3 1 A Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. VIDEO AUX 4 32 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. FM/AM or PRESET /TUNING 3 EDIT Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE 3 AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING EDIT 40 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU AUTO A~~AM~1440 kHz VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU SP A A~~AM~1440 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to PRESET/ TUNING continue searching. TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. VOLUME Automatic preset tuning options INPUT STANDBY /ON D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD VCR 1 SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 PHONES VIDEO AUX 1 32 (U.S.A. model) 1 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. BASIC OPERATION You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. PURE DIRECT SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 41 TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. 4 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE CBL/SAT VCR 1 PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES 3 4 VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 2,5 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 1 C3:AM Tune into a station. See page 40 for tuning instructions. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE 5 CD–R CD SP A TUNER TUNED A :AM 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. TUNER 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C3:AM MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM CD MEMORY TUNED DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER TUNED 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes 6 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C :AM 42 DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT VOLUME STANDBY /ON INPUT PURE DIRECT SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS A STANDBY /ON CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VCR 1 AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE VIDEO AUX B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 TUNING MODE PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS A CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT SILENT CINEMA CD VCR 1 AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC EFFECT PHONES VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 1 2 (U.S.A. model) 1,3 1,3 2,4 2 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL 1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. SOURCE – – – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE When performing this operation with the remote control, first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. PRESET /TUNING CR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E or TV INPUT Front panel Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Remote control V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/– on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. PRESET /TUNING EDIT + or TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET PRESET/ TUNING CD MEMORY TUNED A5:FM 90.6 MHz 4 TUNER MEMORY TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz EDIT 3 CD BASIC OPERATION 1 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A EDIT E1-A5 CH – Front panel CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER English VCR 1 Remote control TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz 43 TUNING Receiving RDS stations RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various RDS data such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks) when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. Changing the RDS mode Four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up in the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/ FREQ (or FREQ/RDS on the remote control) repeatedly to display the various RDS data offered by the transmitting station as shown below. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: RDS MODE /FREQ PS The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: Front panel PTY There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pop ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music or FREQ/RDS RT CT Remote control ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data flow is accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): See “EON function” on page 46. 44 Frequency display mode y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. Notes • Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until an RDS indicator lights up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has not finished receiving all of the RDS data from the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • This unit cannot utilize the RDS data source if the signal received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data may not be received under poor reception conditions. In such cases, press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this will change the reception mode to manual, RDS data may be displayed when you change the display to RDS mode. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front panel display. TUNING PTY SEEK function 2 If you select the desired program type, this unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/– on the remote control) to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears on the front panel display. PRESET/ TUNING VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON Front panel SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE RDS MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK PROGRAM CD–R CBL/SAT VCR 1 TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD SILENT CINEMA MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R START TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT or OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX PRESET + (Europe model) 1 2 CH 3 – Remote control PRESET AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE EXIT MENU 2 3 PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON REC Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up on the front panel display while searching for stations. 8 BASIC OPERATION TOP TITLE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START PTY SEEK 1, 3 MODE START DISC SKIP Front panel y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” blinks in the front panel display. PTY SEEK MODE START Front panel or MODE PTY SEEK START or PTY HOLD Lights up MODE PTY SEEK START Remote control To cancel searching, press PTY SEEK START again. • The unit stops searching when it finds a station broadcasting the selected type of program. • If the found station is not the one you desire one, press PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes searching for another station broadcasting the same type of program. Blinks Remote control To exit from the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE again. English 45 TUNING EON function This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast the selected type of program and switches from the station currently being received to the new station when the broadcast starts. Note This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front panel display. 1 Check that the EON indicator is lit on the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another RDS station so that the EON indicator lights up. 2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name appears on the front panel display. RDS MODE /FREQ EON Front panel or EON Remote control • If a preset RDS station type starts broadcasting the selected type of program, the unit automatically switches from the program being received to that program. (EON indicator flashes.) • When broadcasting of the selected program ends, the unit returns to the previous station (or another program on the same station). ■ To cancel this function Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is shown on the front panel display. 46 RECORDING RECORDING You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT control to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE RDS MODE /FREQ ZONE ON/OFF MAINPTY SEEK ZONE 2 EON PROGRAM CD–R D–TV SPEAKERS A CBL/SAT TUNER MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT CD VCR 1 SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R START TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT OPTICAL DVR /VCR2 YPAO REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 1 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT. • To record the current input source that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE. SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 • To record a source other than the one that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to the source you want to record. SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 After this setting, you can change the source you are listening to and/or watching without effecting the recording by rotating INPUT (or pressing one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. Notes • The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) are always the same. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, Speaker Level (page 64) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. English 3 • To record audio and video from different sources, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 or REC OUT to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a video source first then select an audio source (see page 38). • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. BASIC OPERATION 1 y 47 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 39) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. ENTERTAINMENT: TV Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT: Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT: Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. THX: THX Cinema THX processing for any multi-channel sources (including DTS-ES). 48 Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96 kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS 96/24: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS 96 kHz/ 24-bit DTS sources. DTS 96/24 ES: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. Sources MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS THX: THX Surr. EX THX processing for any 5.1 channel source. English 49 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources. PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for movie software. PLII Movie: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (Dolby Pro Logic II) for movie software. PLIIx Game: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. PLII Game: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. Neo:6 Cinema: SUR. STANDARD DTS processing for movie software. Neo:6 Cinema: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing (DTS Neo:6) for movie software. Sources 2-CH 50 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features 2 (left and right) channel playback. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC: Hall in Munich HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. MUSIC: Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC: Freiburg HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. MUSIC: The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. MUSIC: The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. MUSIC: Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. MUSIC: Classic/Opera CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by highenergy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PLII Music: SUR. STANDARD Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. Neo:6 Music: SUR. STANDARD DTS processing for music software. MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS STEREO: 2ch Stereo Sources MULTI 2-CH English 51 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer SYSTEM POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD POWER 2 SELECT 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP 120 min SLEEP OFF V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SLEEP SLEEP 90 min SLEEP 30 min DVD MD/TAPE SLEEP 60 min CD–R CD TUNER SP A SLEEP PHONO dB VOLUME SLEEP 120min L R The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER SP A SLEEP 52 SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. TRANSMIT POWER Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. Hall in Munich PHONO dB VOLUME L R SYSTEM OPTIONS SYSTEM OPTIONS You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround) Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 89). ■ Input Select (Input select) Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack. Item Features Page I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 56 Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 56 Rename Changes the name of the input. 57 Multi CH Assign Selects the number of audio channels input through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks 57 ■ Manual Setup (Manual setup) Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings. Sound (Sound) Use to manually adjust the sound parameters. Item Features Page LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 59 Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. 59 Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. 60 Item Features Page Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. 61 Speaker Set Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 61 Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 64 Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 64 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic (Basic) Use to quickly setup basic system parameters. English 53 SYSTEM OPTIONS Option (Option) Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item Features Page Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. 65 Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings. 66 Surr.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. 66 Input Mode Selects the initial input mode of the source. 67 Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings. 67 ■ Auto Setup (Auto setup) Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26). ■ System Memory (System memory) Use to save and recall various settings (see page 67). ■ Audio Info. (Audio signal information) Use to check audio signal information (see page 39). 54 SYSTEM OPTIONS Changing parameter settings 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz AMP + + + CH VOL – – SOURCE TV VOL – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 2 TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN 6 3-5 100Hz DISPLAY EFFECT 5 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then press h to enter the selected menu. Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 100Hz Test Tone Speaker Set Front Speaker Distance Center Speaker Level Surround 6 Press EXIT. y If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item. Notes Front Center Large Surround Small Surround Back None Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ADVANCED OPERATION Presence • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67). English 55 SYSTEM OPTIONS Input Select Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input to each jack. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. Example 2: To clear a jack assignment. 1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD, etc.). 2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment (Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or Component Video). 3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the assignment. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Input Select, then press h. CD-R Stereo/Surround DVD Manual Setup DTV Auto Setup 4 MD/TAPE Input Select CBL/SAT Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then press h to access and adjust. ■ I/O Assignment (Input / output assignment) You can assign the digital audio input/output and component video jacks to other components if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component using INPUT SELECTOR on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > I/O Assignment > Example 1: To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input. 1) Select Input Select, then select DVD. 2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select 7 CD. 56 I/O Assignment Optical Output Volume Trim Optical Input Rename Coaxial Input y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. ■ Volume Trim (Volume trim) Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Volume Trim > Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Rename (Rename) Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the GUI and front panel display. (DVD is used as the source component in the following example.) Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or character you want to edit. ■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment) Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign Volume Trim Multi CH Assign I/O Assignment Rename DVD OK 3 4 RESET Press ENTER to select a character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK). Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press ENTER to switch between character types: CAPITAL A to Z, space SMALL a to z, space FIGURE 0 to 9, space MARK !, #, %, &, etc. • Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER when complete. Input Channels This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch Note If Zone2 Amplifier (page 66) is set to “Internal”, no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. Front Input If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select analog jacks to which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). ADVANCED OPERATION 5 Front Input CAPITAL Volume Trim Input Channels English 57 SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual setup: Sound Note Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters. Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 1 ■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range) Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Manual Setup, then press h. Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range > Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN (minimum) LFE Level 4 5 Dynamic Range Speaker MAX Sound Parametric EQ Headphone STD Basic Tone Control Option Audio Option MIN Speaker (Speaker) Select to adjust the speaker compression. Select Sound, then press h. Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. ■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level) Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level > Choices: –20 to 0 (dB) Speaker 0.0dB Headphone Speaker (Speaker) Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone (Headphone) Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 58 Headphone (Headphone) Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. • Select “STD” for general use. • Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the PEQ for any speaker. 4 Press n EDIT and press ENTER to access the edit window. LFE Level Dynamic Range Parametric EQ Test Tone Tone Control Front L Audio Option Front R Test Tone Band Gain Freq. Q #1 0.0dB 125.0Hz 1.000 Front L Front R Center 1 2 Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker you want to adjust. • Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker. • Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the presence right speaker. Press h to access the settings window. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the results. y If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER. 6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the settings window. y • If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic equalizer. • For more information on the parametric equalizer, see “PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 104. ■ Tone Control (Tone control) Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your speakers and headphones. Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control > Control (Tone control) Choices: Defeat, Speaker, Headphone ADVANCED OPERATION PARAM Test Tone The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted. • Press l / h to adjust the parameter. • Press k / n to adjust the Gain. • Press ENTER to exit the edit window. RESET EDIT EXIT Band / Gain Front L Front R Center Defeat Control Speaker Bass Headphone Treble 3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press ENTER to select a parameter from Band (band), Freq (frequency) or Q (Q factor). • Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any adjustments. • Select “Speaker” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers. • Select “Headphone” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones. English 59 SYSTEM OPTIONS Bass (Bass control) Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB You can adjust three frequency bands: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz. Speaker Freq : 125Hz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble Audio Delay (Audio delay) Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) Muting Type 0ms Audio Delay +6 PR/PB Select +0 +6 y Treble (Treble control) Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB You can adjust three frequency bands: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz. Speaker Freq : 3.5kHz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble +6 This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). PR/SB Select (Presence speakers / surround back speakers select) Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker set when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: Presence, Surround Back +0 +6 Muting Type y Audio Delay Presence PR/SB Select Surround Back This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Note TONE CONTROL is not effective when: – The THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected. – MULTI CH INPUT is selected. ■ Audio Option (Audio option) Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings. Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option > Muting Type (Muting type) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: Full, –20dB Muting Type Full Audio Delay -20dB PR/SB Select • Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. 60 • Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual setup: Basic Note Use this menu to set up basic system parameters. Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case, make sure no children are present in the listening room. 1 ■ Speaker Set (Speaker set) Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set > AMP SOURCE y TV If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Manual Setup, then press h. Note Set any THX speakers to Small. Sound Test Tone Basic Speaker Set Option Speaker Distance Speaker Level Front (Front speakers) Choices: Large, Small Large Front Small Center Surround 4 5 Select Basic, then press h. Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. • Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. • You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup procedure (see page 26). • Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. Center (Center speaker) Choices: Large, Small, None ■ Test Tone (Test tone) Front Large Center Small Surround None ADVANCED OPERATION Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone > Choices: Off, On Surround Back Test Tone Off Speaker Set On Speaker Distance y English • If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). • Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. 61 SYSTEM OPTIONS Surround (Surround left/right speakers) Choices: Large, Small, None Front Surround Back (Surround back left/right speakers) Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2, None Center Large Surround Small Center Large x1 None Surround Small x1 Surround Back Small x2 Presence Large x2 Bass Out None Surround Back Presence • Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers. This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 38) and automatically sets the surround back speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”. • Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select “None” if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals. 62 SYSTEM OPTIONS Presence (Presence speakers) Choices: None, Yes Surround Surround Back Presence None Bass Out Yes Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over) Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX) Bass Cross Over • Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers. This unit directs all presence channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers. Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 100Hz Note When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 66), Presence is automatically set to “None”. Bass Out (Bass out) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These lowfrequency signals can be directed to both front left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be used for both stereo reproduction and sound field programs). Choices: Both, SWFR, Front THX recommendation: SWFR SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase) If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your subwoofer. Choices: Normal, Reverse Bass Out Bass Cross Over SWFR Phase Normal Reverse Surround Back Presence Both Bass Out SWFR Bass Cross Over Front y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). SWFR Phase ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer. Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both the subwoofer and front channels, and all other lowfrequency signals are directed in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the front speakers (even if you have previously set Front to Small in Speaker Set). English 63 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance) Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance > Notes • You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the distance in Surround Back L. ■ Speaker Level (Speaker level) Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left speakers and each speaker selected in Speaker Set (see page 61). Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level Test Tone Subwoofer Speaker Set Unit Speaker Distance Front L Speaker Set Speaker Level Front R Speaker Distance Subwoofer Center Speaker Level Front L Presence R Front R Unit (Unit) Choices: Meter, Feet Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet Other models: Meter • Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters. • Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet. Presence R Subwoofer Unit Meter Front L Feet Front R Speaker Distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. • Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 64 Center Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB • Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and presence left speakers. • Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and presence right speakers. • Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. y • To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use the Test Tone (see page 61). • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Notes • You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance in Surround Back L. SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual setup: Option This menu adjusts the optional system settings. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. Video Conv. (Video conversion) Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” not to convert any signals. • Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. y 3 Select Manual Setup, then press h. When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv. to “Off”. 4 Select Option then press h. Notes Sound Display Basic Multi Zone Option Surr.Initialize Input Mode Memory Guard 5 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. 6 When finished adjusting parameters, press ENTER. ■ Display (Display) Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays. Manual Setup > Option > Display > Video Conv. Display Short Message Multi Zone Position Surr.Initialize Wall Paper Dimmer (Dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 Short Message (Short message) Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” to turn off the short message display. • Select “On” to turn on the short message display. Notes • The short message display may not display properly depending on the type of input signal and video monitor used. • If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not displayed even if “On” is selected. Position (Position) Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI display. Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right) • Press k to raise the position of the GUI display. • Press n to lower the position of the GUI display. • Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the right. • Press l to shift the position of the GUI display to the left. ADVANCED OPERATION Dimmer • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Wall Paper (Wallpaper) Use this feature to select the background when no image is input from an external source. If you do not want to display the background, select None. Choices: None, Yes, Gray Back Note y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 65 English If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if “Yes” is selected. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Multi Zone (Multi zone) Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B settings. Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone > Display Speaker B Multi Zone Zone2 Amplifier Surr.Initialize Zone2 Volume Input Mode Zone 3 Volume Speaker B (Speaker B) Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: Main, ZoneB • Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select “ZoneB” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier) Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified. Choices: Internal, External, None • Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. • Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2 feature. Notes • When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting automatically switches to “None”. • When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting automatically switches to “Variable”. Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically set to “Variable”. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). ■ Surr.Initialize (Surround initialize) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within sound field program groups. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in blue. Manual Setup > Option > Surr.Initialize Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All Display STEREO Multi Zone MUSIC Surr.Initialize ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER Input Mode SURROUND Memory Guard All • Press k / n to select the sound field program you want to initialize, then press ENTER. • Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field program parameters. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Note Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory Guard is set to “Guard” (see page 67). 66 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Input Mode (Input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit. Manual Setup > Option > Input Mode Choices: Auto, Last Multi Zone Surr.Initialize Input Mode Auto Memory Guard Last System Memory This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save settings such as the following: • Sound field program parameters • Speaker settings • Speaker channel settings • LFE level • Dynamic range settings • Parametric equalizer settings ■ To save settings • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected source. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). 2 Press TOP on the remote control. Note 3 Select System Memory, then press h. 4 Select Save, then press ENTER. Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD. SUR button. ■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard Choices: Free, Guard Current Memory 1 The Bottom Line A:ON B:OFF Speaker SpeakerCH 3/4/0.1 LFE Level 0dB MAX D-Range Reset PEQ Memory 2 Surr.Initialize Input Mode Current displays the current settings of this unit. Free Guard Select “Guard” to protect: • DSP program parameters • All GUI menu items except Memory Guard and System Memory – Load 5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number under which you want to save the settings, then press h. “Save:ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 6 Press ENTER to save the settings. ADVANCED OPERATION Memory Guard y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 85). Note In general, front panel and remote control operations are not affected by “Guard” functions. However, you cannot adjust the tone control using TONE CONTROL. English 67 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ To recall settings 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select System Memory, then press h. The Bottom Line A:ON B:OFF Speaker SpeakerCH 3/4/0.1 LFE Level 0dB MAX D-Range Reset PEQ Current Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 4 Select Load, then press ENTER. 5 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number you want to recall, then press h. “Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 6 Press ENTER to recall the settings. y Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control. When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1? Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2? Yes: Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 9 68 0 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Display window SELECT PRESET AMP/SOURCE/ TV Set to AMP to operate this unit. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE EXIT TOP TITLE PURE DIRECT MENU The buttons inside the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, INPUT MODE, the input selector buttons, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, PURE DIRECT and STRAIGHT/ EFFECT). A/B buttons and the input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...Tape deck POWER TV AV STANDBY A B TUNER INPUT MODE V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD RETURN AMP + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOL – – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE DISPLAY TV INPUT MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 A SPEAKERS B +10 LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU ENTER LEVEL TOP ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY RE–NAME AUDIO SET MENU EXIT MENU MENU STRAIGHT STEREO HALL 1 2 Component control area You can control up to 14 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 80). JAZZ NIGHT NIGHT RETURN RETURN TV THTR MUSIC 5 6 THX SURROUND 9 0 4 11 +10 ON SCREEN DISPLAY DISPLAY MOVIE 7 STEREO STEREO AUDIO AUDIO ROCK 3 TEST 8 HALL MUSIC JAZZ ENTERTAIN SUR. BACK 22 FREQ/RDS EON 55 99 OFF 66 MODE PTY SEEK START 1 MEMORY 2 THX SURROUND REC DISC SKIP ON MACRO ROCK MOVIE 33 44 SELECT TV THTR EXTD. SUR MOVIE 77 88 ENT. THX ENTERTAIN STANDARD MUSIC 00 CHP/INDEX FREQ/RDS EON FREQ/RDS EON LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME A SPEAKERS SUR.BBACK +10 +10 ENT. ENT. MODE PTY PTYSEEK SEEK START START MODE AMP/ SOURCE/ TV Set to SOURCE to operate the component selected with an input selector button. Set to TV to operate the television (you must set the remote control code in DTV or PHONO). ADVANCED OPERATION CLEAR – TVNIGHT INPUT TV INPUT EFFECT ENTER ENTER MODE PTY SEEK START LEARN CH CH PURE DIRECT TITLE TITLE TEST ENTERTAIN MACRO – TVMUTE MUTE TV Display window REC ON + AA//BB//CC//DD//EE ENT. DISC SKIP TV PRESET PRESET + MUTE TVVOL VOL TV EFFECT STEREO OFF MULTI AV CH IN SELECT – EON POWER TVCD PRESET STRAIGHT FREQ/RDS SLEEP POWER AUDIO ENTER 0 POWER PHONO + NIGHT 9 SELECT k / n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. SYSTEM POWER REC REC DISCSKIP SKIP DISC CHP/INDEX English 69 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area) OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. Remote Control Code Default Settings Notes • You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 72 to program buttons operated within this component control area. • The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is selected in the amplifier library (see page 71). * Input area Library (Component category) Default YAMAHA code* A LD 2200 B TAPE 2700, (2701) PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER 2600, (0203, 1203, 1358, 2601) CD CD 2300, (2301) MULTI CH INPUT DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502) CD-R CD-R 2400 DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807 DVD DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses. Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 70 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. AMP library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control ID (this unit’s setting: see page 84) 2000 To operate this unit using the (initial setting) default code. LEARN 2001 To operate this unit using the default code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 81). (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. 2003 To operate this unit using an alternative code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features of other YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers (see page 81). y If you want to setup for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner), L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite), L:VCR ID1 (initial setting) ID2 When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 4 * The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “2000” in order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary. Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note “0000” appears in the display window if no code has been set. 5 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ADVANCED OPERATION Press the numeric buttons to enter the fourdigit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. English 71 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 6 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 8 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 69). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Note This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control.) 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the remote control code is correct. AMP SOURCE TV TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START 2 REC DISC SKIP DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Press an input selector button to select a source component. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DVD y If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes 3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. MULTI CH IN SLEEP SYSTEM AV CD INPUT MODE TRANSMIT B DVD CD-R POWER TV TUNER MD/TAPE STANDBY A DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 72 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B AV TUNER CD-R POWER A MD/TAPE TV PHONO CBL/SAT POWER V-AUX SELECT TV AMP SOURCE DVD + DVR/VCR2 – VOL VCR 1 + PURE DIRECT AUDIO NIGHT STRAIGHT DTV – CH PRESET – MUTE EXIT MENU DISPLAY + TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E ENTER TV VOL TOP TV MUTE TITLE RETURN 6 • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B DVD CD-R AV TUNER MD/TAPE POWER A DVR/VCR2 TV PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV SELECT V-AUX ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. “NG” appears in the display window if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. y English • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5 and 6. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 6. 73 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Changing source names in the display window 5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. ENTER 6 AMP SOURCE TV Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. y 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD If you continuously want to rename another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming mode. RE-NAME Note 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press RE-NAME again. 4 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. (Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.) ENTER 74 “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 76). Press a macro button CD To automatically transmit these signals in order SYSTEM POWER CD Macro buttons First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY — — (CD area) SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER POWER — — — — — — — — A B PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN — V-AUX V-AUX — CBL/SAT — CBL/SAT — (*3) — (CD area) (*2) SYSTEM POWER MD/TAPE MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE area) (*2) (*1) CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 ADVANCED OPERATION CD-R (CD-R area) (*2) — (VCR 1 area) (*2) (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*2) DVD (DVD area) (*2) *1 75 English You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.) *2 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see page 72) or set a remote control code (see page 70). *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Macro operations ■ Programming macro operations Macro buttons TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME You can program your own macros and use the macro feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. Notes MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a macro button. MACRO • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. Notes • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 76 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and setup remote control codes. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B PHONO TUNER V-AUX DTV STANDBY 2 POWER MCR 2: AV POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SOURCE TV 2 MCR 1: DVD 1 FREQ/RDS EON Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. MODE PTY SEEK START CLEAR REC 3 DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR MCR 3: h RE–NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 3 Indicates the number of macro steps entered L:DVD (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. L:ALL Clears all learned functions. M:ALL Clears all programmed macros RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Flashes alternately so you can set the next step Note 5 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. 4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display window. ADVANCED OPERATION To change the selected source component, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected component and corresponding component control area. Press k / n to select the clear mode. CLEAR Note “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). Note “L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. English Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code(s) and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. y 77 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode. CLEAR Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Clearing individual functions ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 78 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function 4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. FREQ/RDS EON You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE MODE PTY SEEK START TV REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. y MACRO • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. 6 Press LEARN again to exit. Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the macro programming mode. 5 Press MACRO again to exit. ADVANCED OPERATION y Notes 79 English • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 7 8 SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE 9 TV TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU 6 DVD PRESET 3 TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON 0 A SELECT EXTD. SUR 7 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. B MODE PTY SEEK START REC A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 4 TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU DISC SKIP PURE DIRECT 5 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME NIGHT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B *1 *2 *3 *4 DISPLAY DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Cable TV/ TV Satellite tuner LD player CD player MD recorder/ CD recorder Tape deck Tuner AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 Power *1 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV VOL + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV VOL – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 CH + TV channel + *2 Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 PRESET + CH – TV channel – *2 Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 PRESET – TV INPUT/ A/B/C/D/E TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Direction A/B A/B/C/D/E *2 *2 *2 Mute *2 *2 *2 TV MUTE TV mute TITLE Title MENU Menu Menu Menu ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select k Menu up Menu up Menu up n Menu down Menu down Menu down l Menu left Menu left Menu left h Menu right Menu right Menu right RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward EON *4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 VCR rec *3 s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play Display Display h Play AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display ENTER TV mute Title TV mute Title TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 Title Preset stations (1-8) Search backward FREQ *4 Skip backward Direction back PTY MODE *4 Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward PTY START *4 Disc skip Rec Rec Skip backward Audio Enter Display Display Enter/recall Enter/ numeric button Display This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only. 80 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. • A video monitor for the second room. y OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT This unit • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ■ System configuration and connections example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 66). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT ADVANCED OPERATION SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 2 ZONE 3 Infrared emitter Main room Second room REMOTE OUT REMOTE 1 IN Third room REMOTE 2 IN • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 81 English Notes ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 66). R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second/third room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. 6 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. 7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3. ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– to control the selected room. 1 LEARN ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window. Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 SELECT MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 70. 3 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”. ENTER 4 Press ENTER. “2000” appears in the display window. 5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”. For details, see page 71. 82 or 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby individually. • When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or “2002” (see page 71) is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/standby simultaneously. LCD display Normal mode* Name of component Note Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. 4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– buttons. POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP SELECT AMP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV * A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT * VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu (see page 66). 5 “Zone2” or “2:name of component” Turns Zone 2 to on/ standby Zone 3 mode “Zone3” or “3:name of component” Turns Zone 3 to on/ standby Turns everything (the main unit, Zone 2, Zone 3) on/standby “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. ■ Special considerations for DTS software SYSTEM POWER Turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode System mode “SYSTM” * SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Notes • The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed For DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/ Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. ADVANCED OPERATION Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/ Zone 3 mode. The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. English 83 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. Advanced setup menu This menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the settings to reflect the needs of your listening environment. 1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode. 2 On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. STRAIGHT ■ SP IMP. (Speaker impedance) Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN • Select “6ΩMIN” for speakers that are 6 ohm or higher. • Select “8ΩMIN” for speakers that are 8 ohm or higher. ■ PRESET (Factory preset) Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial factory settings with the exception of System Memory and Auto Setup settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this unit’s parameters. • Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters. STANDBY /ON ■ REMOTE (Remote control ID) EFFECT 3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired operation. The name of the selected operation appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition (see page 71). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2000” or “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2002” or “2003”. ■ FAN MODE (Fan operation mode) 4 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the setting. 5 Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting This unit enters the standby mode. y The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of this unit. 84 Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan. Choices: AUTO, CONT • Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically according to the temperature of this unit. • Select “CONT” to set the fan to operate continuously regardless of the temperature of this unit. ■ TU (Tuner frequency step) (Asia and General models only) Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS Front panel display system options menu This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access most GUI menu system option parameters without using a video monitor. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then press ENTER to enter the selected item. 4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. 5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 6 Press DISPLAY to exit. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP EXIT TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER 3-5 STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 2, 6 y If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return to the previously selected menu item. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to enter the menu. ■ AUTO SETUP Item Sub-items Features SETUP AUTO RELOAD • Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup adjusts. • Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu (see page 27). EQ NATURAL FLAT FRONT • Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup uses. • Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI menu (see page 28). START [ENTER] ADVANCED OPERATION • Use to activate the auto setup procedure. • Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 28). English 85 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ■ MANUAL SETUP 1 BASIC MENU Item Sub-items Features A)SPEAKER SET FRONT;;;;SMALL CENTER;;;;;SML SURR.LR;;;;SML SURR.B;;;SMLx2 PRESENCE;;NONE BASS OUT;;SWFR SWFR C/O;;80Hz SWFR PHASE;NRM • Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. • Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu (see page 61). B)SP DISTANCE UNIT;;;;meters FRONT L;;;3.0m FRONT R;;;3.0m CENTER;;;;3.0m SURR L;;;;3.0m SURR R;;;;3.0m SB L;;;;;;2.1m SB R;;;;;;2.1m SWFR;;;;;;3.0m PRES L;;;;3.0m PRES R;;;;3.0m FRONT L;;;10.0 FRONT R;;;10.0 CENTER;;;;10.0 SURR L;;;;10.0 SURR R;;;;10.0 SB L;;;;;;;7.0 SB R;;;;;;;7.0 SWFR;;;;;;10.0 PRES L;;;;10.0 PRES R;;;;10.0 • Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu (see page 64). C)SP LEVEL FR-----||----C-----||----FL-----||----SL-----||----SBL-----||----SBR-----||----SR-----||----SWFR-----||----PR.R-----||----PR.L-----||----- • Adjusts the output level of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu (see page 64). D)TEST TONE TEST TONE;;OFF • Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels. • Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu (see page 61). 86 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 2 SOUND MENU Item Sub-items Features A)LFE LEVEL SP LFE;;;;;;;0 HP LFE;;;;;;;0 • Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu (see page 58). B)D.RANGE SP D.R;;;;;MAX HP D.R;;;;;MAX • Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu (see page 58). C)TONE CON FRQ BASS FRQ.350Hz TRBL FRQ.xxkHz • Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. • Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu (see page 59). D)AUDIO OPTION A.MUTE;;;;MUTE A.DELAY;;;;;;0 PRch >SBch • Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. • Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu (see page 60). 3 INPUT MENU Item Sub-items Features A)I/O ASSIGN C.V[A] DVD C.V[B] DTV C.V[C]CBL/SAT OUT(1)MD/TAPE OUT(2) CD-R IN (3) CD IN (4) DVD IN (5) DTV IN (6)CBL/SAT IN (7) CD IN (8) DVD IN (9)DVR/VCR2 B)INPUT TRIM PHONO;;;;;;;0 • Adjusts the output volume of each jack. • Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu (see page 56). C)INPUT MODE >AUTO • Selects the initial input mode of the source. • Corresponds to Input Mode in the GUI menu (see page 67). D)INPUT RENAME DVD ._DVD • Changes the name of the input. • Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu (see page 57). E)MULTI CH IN >6CH 8CH DVD ->FRNT • Selects the number of audio channels input through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. • Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu (see page 57). ADVANCED OPERATION LAST • Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. • Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu (see page 56). English 87 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 4 OPTION MENU Item Sub-items Features A)DISPLAY SET DIMMER;;;;;;;0 WALL PAPER;;ON SHORT MSG. ON V CONV.;;;;;ON • Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. • Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu (see page 65). B)MEMORY GUARD MEM.GUARD;;OFF • Locks the menu parameter settings. • Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu (see page 67). C)SURR.INI PRESS DSP Key Cinema DSP • Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. • Corresponds to Surr.Initialize in the GUI menu (see page 66). D)ZONE SET SP B;;;;;;MAIN • Customizes the Zone B parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 66). E)ZONE2 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP;;EXT • Customizes the Zone 2 parameters (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only). • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 66). F)ZONE3 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. • Customizes the Zone 3 parameters (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only). • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 66). 88 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. The following parameters are not always found in every program. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press TOP on the remote control. 3 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. STEREO 4 MUSIC Munich ENTERTAINMENT Vienna MOVIE THEATER Freiburg Select the desired sound field program, then press h to access and adjust. Munich DSP Level Vienna Init. Delay Freiburg Room Size Note Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. To reset all parameters Use Surr.Initialize (see page 66). 89 English ■ Resetting parameters to the factory values ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Free” (see page 67). SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP Level (DSP level) Function: Description: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control Range: –6 dB – +3 dB ■ Init. Delay (Initial delay) Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control Range: 1 – 99 ms Source Sound Time Initial delay Level Level Level Early Reflections Initial delay Time Initial delay Time Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ Room Size (Room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 90 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Liveness (Liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control Range: 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 ms ■ Sur.Room Size (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 ms ■ SB Room Size (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB Liveness (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 English 91 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Rev.Time (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 s Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation time Sound Source 60 dB Reverberation time Reverberation time Short Reverberation Long Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ Rev.Delay (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 ms Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Reverberation delay Reverberation time ■ Rev.Level (Reverberation level) Level Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Source Sound Reverberation level Time 92 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 0. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ Center Level (Center level) ■ Surround L Level (Surround left level) ■ Surround R Level (Surround right level) ■ Sur. Back Level (Surround back level) ■ Presence L Level (Presence left level) ■ Presence R Level (Presence right level) For PLIIx Music and PLII Music ■ Panorama Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. Off/On, initial setting is Off. ■ Dimension Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ Center Width Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control Range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For Neo:6 Music ■ Center Image Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. Control Range: 0.0 – 1.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 93 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Decode Type (Decoder type) For MOVIE THEATER Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs. Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6 For THX Cinema Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6 For SURROUND Standard Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard. Pro Logic / PLII Movie / PLII Music / PLII Game / PLIIx Movie / PLIIx Music / PLIIx Game / Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music For SURROUND Enhanced Function: Choices: 94 Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced. Pro Logic / Pro Logic II / Pro Logic IIx / Neo:6 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 25 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 17–22 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. — The input mode is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO”. 39 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 32 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 32 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 34 The input mode is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 39 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 65 13–16 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause English 95 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 25 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 34 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 17 Incorrect balance settings in the GUI menu. Adjust the Speaker Level settings. 64 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. 38 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 33 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 64 Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 61 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 33 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 64 Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 A monaural or stereo source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select. 60 Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to “None”, surround back speakers are automatically set to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 Surround Back is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or “Large x2”. 62 Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select “SWFR” or “Both”. 63 Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Select “Both”. 63 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy The source does not contain low bass signals. 96 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy Refer to page The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 39 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 21 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 21 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A “humming” sound can be heard. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 17–21 17–21 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. Memory Guard is set to “Guard”. Select “Free”. 67 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radiofrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or radio-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — English The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. 97 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 98 Cause Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 40 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 40 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 41 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 40 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly. 70 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. 70 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 72 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 72 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 77 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 99 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. It provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels. An additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with a previously unheard of excitement and realism. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “flyaround” effects. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx ■ Neo:6 ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or 7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. 100 Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. GLOSSARY ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sound field programs ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 101 GLOSSARY Audio information ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering studios. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Adaptive decorrelation In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. Re-equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. Timbre matching The human ear changes our perception of sound depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The timbre matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. 102 GLOSSARY ■ THX Select Before any home theatre component can be THX Select certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ THX Surround EX THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 103 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 104 Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 130 W • Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Australia, China, Asia, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................180 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General models] 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................190 W • Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02% CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04% AM SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................................... 81 dB [Other models] ....................................................................... 86 dB CD (250 mV) to Front L/R .................................................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................ 3.5 kHz • Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model]..................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................... 0.2 W [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ................................. 0.33 W [Other models] .................................................................. 0.15 W • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models].................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”) • Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W English 105